HomeMy WebLinkAboutCONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS - 20-00839 - BYUI Hart Building - MEP-B Remodel
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO
REXBURG, IDAHO
JOHN W. HART BUILDING
PHASE MEP B - REMODEL
Construction Documents Bid Set
October 6, 2020
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 0000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY
SECTION 01 2500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
SECTION 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
SECTION 01 3200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
SECTION 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 7300 EXECUTION
SECTION 01 7419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
SECTION 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
SECTION 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
SECTION 02 4119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 05 – METALS
SECTION 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
SECTION 05 3100 STEEL DECKING
SECTION 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07 5323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
SECTION 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING
SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
SECTION 22 0000 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 22 0100 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING
SECTION 22 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-2
SECTION 22 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION
SECTION 22 1100 DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 1300 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 1426 FLOOR DRAINS
SECTION 22 4200 PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
SECTION 23 0000 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 23 0100 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
SECTION 23 0505 MECHANICAL FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 23 0513 MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
MECHANICAL WORK
SECTION 23 0519 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES
SECTION 23 0523 VALVES
SECTION 23 0529 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES
SECTION 23 0548 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
SECTION 23 0553 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
SECTION 23 0700 MECHANICAL INSULATION
SECTION 23 0900 MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC)
SECTION 23 0933 ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 23 2000 GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
SECTION 23 2500 CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT FILTERS AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 3100 DUCTWORK
SECTION 23 3300 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
SECTION 23 3616 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
SECTION 23 3713 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
SECTION 23 7300 PACKAGED AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 23 8200 TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 0501 COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 26 0502 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 26 0503 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 0519 LINE-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL CONDUCTORS AND CABLE
SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 0553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 26 2417 PANEL BOARDS
SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 0000-1
SECTION 01 0000 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general requirements that are to apply to all Work throughout the Project.
Requirements included in this Section are to apply to all other specification Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. “Center of...”: Indicates a specific single point at the exact center of the tile, panel, or other
surface indicated.
D. Conforms”: When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, “conforms” is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
E. “Contractor”: The General Contractor unless otherwise stated.
F. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
G. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
H. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
I. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to
dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.
J. “Project Manager”: The Contractor’s project manager.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 0000-2
K. “Project Representative”: The Owner’s project representative(s).
L. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.
M. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
N. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
O. “Related Sections”: Related Sections articles are included herein as a courtesy to assist in the
locating of items in the specifications that the reader might expect to find in the Section but that
are specified elsewhere. The list of sections may or may not be complete. ‘Related Sections’
articles do not relieve the Contractor of the contractual obligation to perform to all the Contract
Documents or to coordinate who does what amongst the team of subcontractors.
1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's
"Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books'
"National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."
1.6 SITE INSPECTION
A. Examine the premises and site and compare them with the drawings and specifications.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 0000-3
B. Become familiar with existing conditions such as obstructive areas, excavating or filling, and
any problems related to construction. No allowances will subsequently be made by reason of
failure to examine the site.
1.7 SCOPE OF THE WORK
A. See Section 01 1000 “Summary” for an overall general summary of the Work.
B. Unless otherwise provided, all materials, labor, equipment, tools, transportation, and utilities
necessary for the successful completion of the Project shall be provided at the expense of the
Contractor.
C. Requirements of the Work are contained in the Contract Documents, and include cross-
references herein to published information, which is not necessarily bound therewith.
D. Provide, as part of the Bid and without additional charge, all incidental items required for
completion of the Work, even if not specifically indicated.
1. Install all Work so that its several component parts function together as a complete and
workable system, and with all equipment properly adjusted and in working order.
E. Conform to highest quality standards for materials and workmanship to execute Work that is
indicated or specified and that is necessary to fully satisfy the Contract Document requirements
for a complete, finished, acceptable installation regardless of whether indicated or specified or
not.
F. Responsibilities of the Contractor includes the responsibility to verify all field measurements of
actual building conditions so that all Work fits properly in the locations indicated and specified.
Protect existing structures, improvements, trees, and other items from physical damage, unless
identified to be removed.
G. Any existing surfaces, furniture or equipment that are damaged by the Contractor are to be
restored to their original condition, or better, to the satisfaction of the Owner.
H. Restore roads, utilities, walks, curbs, gutters or other improvements belonging to the Owner, to
the same condition as they existed prior to commencement of construction. Where said
improvements are damaged, they shall be replaced by new Work to match existing adjacent
Work, or repaired if acceptable to Project Representative, at no cost to Owner.
1.8 WORKERS
A. Enforce strict discipline and good order among his/her employees at all times and shall not
employ on the Project any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the Work assigned to him/her.
B. Consumption of alcohol or any other controlled, non-medically prescribed substance will not be
allowed on the Project.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 0000-4
C. Rectify behavior unacceptable to the Owner or Owner’s Project Representative by strict
enforcement of discipline. Owner reserves the right to request dismissal of individual workers
for failure to comply with standards of behavior communicated to the Contractor.
1.9 TAXES
A. The Contractor shall pay sales, use, payroll, unemployment, old age pension, or surtax
applicable to this project.
B. The Owner shall pay taxes and assessments on real property comprising the site of this project.
1.10 MANUFACTURER’S DIRECTIONS
A. Manufactured articles, materials, or equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected,
used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with the Manufacturer’s printed directions unless
otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.
1.11 FASTENERS
A. Unless noted otherwise, the trade requiring the fastening of its Work to any substrate or support
is responsible for provision and installation of requisite fasteners.
1.12 PENETRATIONS
A. The sealing of all penetrations in fire-rated, acoustically-rated or structural partitions and
separations is the responsibility of the trade making or requiring the penetration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 0000
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUMMARY 01 1000 - 1
SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Access to site.
4. Work restrictions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: John W. Hart Building Phase MEP-B Remodel.
1. Project Location: Brigham Young University – Idaho; Rexburg Idaho.
2. FFKR Project No# 20054.
B. Owner: Brigham Young University – Idaho.
C. Architect: FFKR Architects, 730 Pacific Avenue, Salt Lake City, Utah 84104, (801) 521-6186.
D. Contractor: Big-D has been engaged as Contractor/CmGC for this Project.
1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1. The Work includes selective demolition and remodeling at roof of existing John W. Hart
Building as indicated.
B. Type of Contract:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUMMARY 01 1000 - 2
1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Restricted Use of Site: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction
operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of
this Section.
B. Limits on Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do
not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of adjacent Project site and use by the
public. Confine constructions operations to construction limits indicated on Drawings. Do
not disrupt normal operations in adjacent buildings or portions of buildings indicated to
remain. Operations not to be disrupted include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Emergency vehicle access.
b. Public transportation access.
c. Access for building waste removal.
d. Access for building deliveries.
e. Access to exits and entrances for building patrons and the public.
f. Utilities and other services to the building.
2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances serving premises
clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times.
Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
C. Condition of Existing Grounds: Maintain portions of existing grounds, landscaping, and
hardscaping affected by construction operations throughout construction period. Repair damage
caused by construction operations.
1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUMMARY 01 1000 - 3
C. Smoking and Controlled Substance Restrictions: Use of tobacco products, alcoholic beverages,
and other controlled substances on Owner's property is not permitted.
D. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on
Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.
E. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of
Contractor personnel working on Project site.
1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 1000
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500-1
SECTION 01 2500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 2100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.
2. Section 01 2300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
3. Section 01 6000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable
product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or
Owner.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit documentation identifying product or fabrication or installation
method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers
and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method
cannot be provided, if applicable.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500-2
b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and
addresses as well as names and addresses of architects and owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting
test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from ICC-ES.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays
in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution
with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility
tests recommended by manufacturers.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500-3
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed unless otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 2500
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-1
SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General coordination procedures.
2. RFIs.
3. Project Transfer Website (Newforma).
4. Project meetings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting
Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Section 01 7300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and
field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
3. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking
information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or
supplying products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-2
B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key
personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses, cellular telephone
numbers, and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals
assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and in prominent
location in built facility. Keep list current at all times.
1.5 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or
interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the
form specified.
1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities
controlled by Contractor.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner to avoid delays in Contractor's work or
work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name of Architect.
3. Architect's Project number.
4. Date.
5. Name of Contractor.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716.
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-3
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
Allow seven days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00
p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional
information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
General Conditions of the Contract.
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI
response.
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Include the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number, including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
1.6 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES
A. Web-Based Project Software: Use Architect's web-based Project software site (Newforma) for
purposes of Project communication and documentation until Final Completion.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-4
B. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as
follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file, incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required,
provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated.
1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times a minimum of 10 working days prior to meeting.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions
and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,
including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments.
b. Tentative construction schedule.
c. Critical work sequencing and long lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Lines of communications.
f. Use of web-based Project software.
g. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
h. Procedures for RFIs.
i. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
k. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
l. Submittal procedures.
m. Preparation of Record Documents.
n. Use of the premises and existing building.
o. Work restrictions.
p. Working hours.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-5
q. Owner's occupancy requirements.
r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
s. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
t. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
u. Parking availability.
v. Office, work, and storage areas.
w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
x. First aid.
y. Security.
z. Progress cleaning.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity when required by other Sections and when required for coordination with
other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility requirements.
k. Time schedules.
l. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written instructions.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-6
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties
requiring information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.
1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site use.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
13) Status of RFIs.
14) Status of Proposal Requests.
15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100-7
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the
meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress
meeting, where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 3100
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200-1
SECTION 01 3200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Construction schedule updating reports.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Material location reports.
5. Site condition reports.
6. Unusual event reports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction Project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine the critical path of Project and when activities can be performed.
C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200-2
1. PDF file.
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.
1. Submit a working digital copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals.
C. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for
each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource
loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date,
late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1. Activity Report: List of activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or
actual start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for each activity, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then by early start date, or actual start date if
known.
D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
F. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
H. Unusual Event Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,
submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities, and schedule
them in proper sequence.
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has
been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of
Final Completion.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200-3
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
C. Activities: Treat each floor or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless
specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Temporary Facilities: Indicate start and completion dates for the following as applicable:
a. Securing of approvals and permits required for performance of the Work.
b. Temporary facilities.
c. Construction of mock-ups, prototypes and samples.
d. Owner interfaces and furnishing of items.
e. Regulatory agency approvals.
f. Punch list.
3. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long
lead-time items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate
activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to,
submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
4. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in
Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times
in Contractor's Construction Schedule with submittal schedule.
5. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.
6. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
7. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch
list items and Final Completion.
D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
2. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
delivery date indicated in Section 01 1000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate
the earliest possible delivery date.
3. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery
date indicated in Section 01 1000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the
earliest possible delivery date.
4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
c. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use-of-premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200-4
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.
5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards.
b. Submittals.
c. Purchases.
d. Mockups.
e. Fabrication.
f. Sample testing.
g. Deliveries.
h. Installation.
i. Tests and inspections.
j. Adjusting.
k. Curing.
6. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of
the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be
sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a. Structural completion.
b. Completion of mechanical installation.
c. Completion of electrical installation.
d. Substantial Completion.
E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion
F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered Requests for Information.
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.
5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and the Contract Time.
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Final Completion percentage for each activity.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200-5
H. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
1.7 CPM SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS
A. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a time-scaled CPM network
analysis diagram for the Work.
1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule, so it can be
accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for commencement of the
Work.
a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall
not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion
dates.
2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including
subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule
information.
3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting
progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days
and holidays incorporated into the schedule to coordinate with the Contract Time.
B. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using
the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.
1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship
of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the
following activities:
a. Preparation and processing of submittals.
b. Mobilization and demobilization.
c. Purchase of materials.
d. Delivery.
e. Fabrication.
f. Utility interruptions.
g. Installation.
h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.
i. Testing and inspection.
j. Punch list and Final Completion.
k. Activities occurring following Final Completion.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200-6
2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract
milestone dates.
3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled
network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary
to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate
paths with most float near the edges.
a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical
path.
C. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect
of the proposed change on the overall Project schedule.
D. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating
straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the
following:
1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
2. Description of activity.
3. Main events of activity.
4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
5. Early and late start dates.
6. Early and late finish dates.
7. Activity duration in workdays.
8. Average size of workforce.
9. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).
E. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
showing the following:
1. Identification of activities that have changed.
2. Changes in early and late start dates.
3. Changes in early and late finish dates.
4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
5. Changes in the critical path.
6. Changes in the Contract Time.
F. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates.
1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar
value.
2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative
dollar value.
3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as
of list date.
4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with
progress meetings.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200-7
a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative
value completed" with total at bottom.
1.8 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
3. Equipment at Project site.
4. Material deliveries.
5. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or
snow.
6. Testing and inspection.
7. Accidents.
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
9. Unusual events.
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
12. Emergency procedures.
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
16. Services connected and disconnected.
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.
18. Partial completions and occupancies.
19. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of
materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials
previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on
and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project
site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:
1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.
2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed.
3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.
C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
D. Unusual Event Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project
site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain
of events, persons participating, responses by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or
effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are
known or predictable.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200-8
1. Submit unusual event reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence.
Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 3200
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-1
SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Submittal schedule requirements.
2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports, and
schedule of tests and inspections.
3. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting closeout submittals and
maintenance material submittals.
4. Section 01 7839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as "action submittals."
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "informational submittals."
1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in
chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for
review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-2
additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect
and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal.
b. Specification Section number and title.
c. Submittal Category: Action; informational.
d. Name of subcontractor.
e. Subcontractor preparing the submittal.
f. Description of the Work covered.
g. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.
i. Scheduled date of fabrication.
j. Scheduled dates for installation.
k. Activity or event number.
1.5 SUBMITTAL FORMATS
A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name of Architect.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
6. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
7. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section
number with sequential alphanumeric identifier and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals.
8. Category and type of submittal.
9. Submittal purpose and description.
10. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for
each of multiple items.
11. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
12. Indication of full or partial submittal.
13. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
14. Other necessary identification.
15. Remarks.
16. Signature of transmitter.
B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from
requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include
relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect on
previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate
sheet.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-3
D. Electronic Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, incorporating complete information
into each PDF file. Name PDF file with submittal number.
E. Submittals Utilizing Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals as PDF files or other
format indicated by Project management software.
1.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of
submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1. Web-Based Project Management Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload
to web-based Project management software website. Enter required data in web-based
software site to fully identify submittal.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless
partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different
Sections, so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the
Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of
the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as
initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.
D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-4
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block, and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
stamp.
E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action
submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
1.7 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrently with Samples.
B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data unless
submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-5
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of type, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other materials.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components, such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the
following:
a. Project name and submittal number.
b. Generic description of Sample.
c. Product name and name of manufacturer.
d. Sample source.
e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. Web-Based Project Management Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload
to web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to
fully identify submittal.
4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units, showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-6
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two
Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample
set as a project record Sample.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to
be demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary
indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with
indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of
assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and
version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal.
G. Certificates:
1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated.
2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead, certifying
that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required,
is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead,
certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead, certifying
that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead, certifying
that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of AWS
B2.1/B2.1M on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-7
H. Test and Research Reports:
1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests
performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for substrate
preparation and primers required.
2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final
location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance
with requirements in the Contract Documents.
4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed
before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the
Contract Documents.
5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing
agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for
Project. Include the following information:
a. Name of evaluation organization.
b. Date of evaluation.
c. Time period when report is in effect.
d. Product and manufacturers' names.
e. Description of product.
f. Test procedures and results.
g. Limitations of use.
1.8 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file paper copies of certificate, signed and
sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned
to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-8
1.9 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for
coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents.
Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to
Architect.
B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with a uniform
approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement
certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the
Contract Documents.
1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have
Contractor's review and approval.
1.10 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW
A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions
required, and return where required by Contract Documents.
1. PDF Submittals: Architect will indicate, via markup on each submittal, the appropriate
action, as follows:
1) “No Exceptions”: Architect has no exceptions to submittal.
2) “Revise and Resubmit”: Architect requires submittal to be revised and
resubmitted.
3) Provide as Noted: Architect has no exceptions to submittal as revised by
Architect’s notes indicated on submittal.
4) “Returned Without Action”: Architect returns submittal without action
because submittal was not required by the Contract Documents.
2. Submittals by Web-Based Project Management Software: Architect will indicate, on
Project management software website, the appropriate action.
a. Actions taken by indication on Project management software website have the
following meanings:
1) “No Exceptions”: Architect has no exceptions to submittal.
2) “Revise and Resubmit”: Architect requires submittal to be revised and
resubmitted.
3) Provide as Noted: Architect has no exceptions to submittal as revised by
Architect’s notes indicated on submittal.
4) “Returned Without Action”: Architect returns submittal without action
because submittal was not required by the Contract Documents.
B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-9
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review.
E. Architect will return without review, or discard submittals received from sources other than
Contractor.
F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Architect without
action.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 3300
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-1
SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual work results
are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual
Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract
Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services
required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by
provisions of this Section.
4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced," unless otherwise further
described, means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in
nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and
having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Field Quality-Control Tests and Inspections: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site
for installation of the Work and for completed Work.
C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, subcontractor, or sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a Work result does not require that
certain construction activities specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-2
D. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site either as freestanding
temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to
verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities
of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface
between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation
tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish
the standard by which the Work will be judged.
E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance
with specified criteria. Unless otherwise indicated, copies of reports of tests or inspections
performed for other than the Project do not meet this definition.
F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to
NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency
qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
G. Source Quality-Control Tests and Inspections: Tests and inspections that are performed at the
source (e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop).
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. The term
"testing laboratory" shall have the same meaning as the term "testing agency."
I. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work, to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
J. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work, to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not
include contract administration activities performed by Architect.
1.4 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Statement: Submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible
design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be
designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in
compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and
other factors used in performing these services.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-3
1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or
requirements is specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting
requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, inform the Architect regarding the
conflict and obtain clarification prior to proceeding with the Work. Refer conflicting
requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for clarification before
proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and
responsibilities.
B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.
C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,
submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction
before starting work on the following systems:
1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the
Statement of Special Inspections.
2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the Statement
of Special Inspections.
D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
3. Description of test and inspection.
4. Identification of applicable standards.
5. Identification of test and inspection methods.
6. Number of tests and inspections required.
7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
E. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified.
F. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-4
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample-taking and testing and
inspection.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making
report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement of whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting
manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized service
representative making report.
2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
4. Statement of whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-5
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required;
individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products
from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and
technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or
assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose
work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that is similar in material, design, and
extent to those indicated for this Project.
F. Testing and Inspecting Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent
agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as
documented in accordance with ASTM E329, and with additional qualifications specified in
individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.
G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation
of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect, demonstrate, repair, and
perform service on installations of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design,
and extent to those indicated for this Project.
I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following Contractor's responsibilities, including the following:
1. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-6
2. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
3. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to
adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.
4. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups, using installers who will perform
same tasks for Project.
5. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility, using personnel, products, and methods of
construction indicated for the completed Work.
6. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies, and mockups, and
laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.
7. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor.
Interpret tests and inspections, and state in each report whether tested and inspected Work
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups of size indicated.
2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers
who will be employed to perform same tasks during the construction at Project.
5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting corresponding Work, fabrication,
or construction.
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
7. Promptly correct unsatisfactory conditions noted by Architect's preliminary review, to the
satisfaction of the Architect, before completion of final mockup.
8. Approval of mockups by the Architect does not constitute approval of deviations from
the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves
such deviations in writing.
9. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
10. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
1.9 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to
perform.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-7
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by Work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or
not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor
by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspection will be performed.
4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections, and state in each report whether tested and
inspected Work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.
E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 3300 "Submittal
Procedures."
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-8
F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical
representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed
portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
G. Contractor's Associated Requirements and Services: Cooperate with agencies and
representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and
provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of
operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project
site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and
quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-
control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with
Contractor's Construction Schedule. Update and submit with each Application for Payment.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party
involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special
tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner,
and as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control
procedures, and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform
the Work.
2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed
in the Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-9
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections, and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
Work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and
inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample-taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas
and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in
Section 01 7300 "Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01 4000
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-1
SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities, to extent not already provided.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. Installation, removal, and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract
Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use temporary
services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces,
Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is
available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections
and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is
available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections
and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections, staging
areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for construction
personnel.
B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for
commencement of the Work, submit schedule indicating implementation and termination dates
of each temporary utility.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-2
C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Show fabrication and installation details, including
plans, elevations, details, layouts, typestyles, graphic elements, and message content.
D. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having
jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention
program.
E. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the
dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time
frame for their operation. Include the following:
1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.
2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.
3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge.
4. Waste-handling procedures.
5. Other dust-control measures.
F. Noise and Vibration Control Plan: Identify construction activities that may impact the
occupancy and use of existing spaces within the building or adjacent existing buildings, whether
occupied by others, or occupied by the Owner. Include the following:
1. Methods used to meet the goals and requirements of the Owner.
2. Concrete cutting method(s) to be used.
3. Location of construction devices on the site.
4. Show compliance with the use and maintenance of quieted construction devices for the
duration of the Project.
5. Indicate activities that may disturb building occupants and that are planned to be
performed during non-standard working hours as coordinated with the Owner.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the United States Access
Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-
spread rating of 15 or less in accordance with ASTM E84 and passing NFPA 701 Test
Method 2.
B. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-Off Mats: Provide mats, minimum 36 by 60 inches.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices: Continue use of existing Owner-provided conditioned interior space for field
offices.
B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
1. Store combustible materials apart from building.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 1000 "Summary."
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-4
B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water
service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these
facilities to condition existing before initial use.
C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, safety shower and eyewash
facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures
and facilities.
D. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering
occupied areas.
1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be
performed.
a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems
servicing occupied areas.
b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area, using HEPA-equipped air-
filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction,
and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.
2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-
producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-
containment devices.
3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-
equipped vacuum equipment.
E. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment
in a condition acceptable to Owner.
F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
G. Electronic Communication Service: Provide secure WiFi wireless connection to internet with
provisions for access by Architect and Owner.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the following:
1. If needed, provide construction for shops and sheds located within construction area or
within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible in accordance with ASTM E136.
Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Utilize designated area within existing building for temporary field offices.
3. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-5
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.
B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain, including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.
D. Storage and Staging: Use designated areas of Project site for storage and staging needs.
E. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and
individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
2. Maintain and touch up signs, so they are legible at all times.
F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste
from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 01 7300 "Execution."
H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
I. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators
are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,
restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide
shoes, and similar items of limited life.
1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.
2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect
elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become
damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make
required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
J. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are
cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore
stairs to condition existing before initial use.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-6
1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs
and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas, so no
evidence remains of correction work.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and
other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 1000 "Summary."
C. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
D. Temporary Egress: Provide temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and
as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide signage directing occupants to temporary
egress.
E. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt
migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and students from fumes and noise.
1. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each side.
Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up
the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-
treated plywood.
a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with
not less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in
vestibule.
2. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by
authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.
3. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas.
4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security
locks where openings are required.
5. Protect air-handling equipment.
6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.
F. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Comply with additional limits on smoking
specified in other Sections.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-7
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign, stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,
when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been
delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed
surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01 5000
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-1
SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for Contractor requirements related to Owner-furnished
products.
2. Section 01 2100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.
3. Section 01 2300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
4. Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
5. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Salvaged items or items reused from other projects are not considered new
products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials
are considered new products, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Comparable Product: Product by named manufacturer that is demonstrated and approved
through the comparable product submittal process described in Part 2 "Comparable
Products" Article, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-
service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal
or exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product
is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-2
number or other designation. Published attributes and characteristics of basis-of-design product
establish salient characteristics of products.
1. Evaluation of Comparable Products: In addition to the basis-of-design product
description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant
qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight,
dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements
for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the
specification. Manufacturer's published attributes and characteristics of basis-of-design
product also establish salient characteristics of products for purposes of evaluating
comparable products.
C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with
requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section,
provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named
product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the
specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that
does meet the requirements of the specifications; submit a comparable product request or
substitution request, if applicable.
D. Comparable Product Request Submittal: An action submittal requesting consideration of a
comparable product, including the following information:
1. Identification of basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be
replaced, including Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and
titles.
2. Data indicating compliance with the requirements specified in Part 2 "Comparable
Products" Article.
E. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: An action submittal complying with
requirements in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures."
F. Substitution: Refer to Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" for definition and limitations
on substitutions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or
imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or
equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.
1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where
required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not
conspicuous.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-3
2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service- or
power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface.
Include information essential for operation, including the following:
a. Name of product and manufacturer.
b. Model and serial number.
c. Capacity.
d. Speed.
e. Ratings.
3. See individual identification Sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 for additional
equipment identification requirements.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of approved comparable products
and approved substitutions.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products, using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment.
2. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
3. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
4. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation and with
adequate protection from wind.
5. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-4
6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written standard warranty form furnished by individual
manufacturer for a particular product and issued in the name of the Owner or endorsed by
manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner and issued in the name of the Owner or endorsed by
manufacturer to Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included in the Project Manual, prepare a
written document, using indicated form properly executed.
3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting
requirements of the Contract Documents.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-5
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," "or
approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"
Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
a. Submit additional documentation required by Architect in order to establish
equivalency of proposed products. Unless otherwise indicated, evaluation of "or
equal" product status is by the Architect, whose determination is final.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for
Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide the following."
2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products by the following."
3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not
be considered unless otherwise indicated.
a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide one of the following."
4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both
available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed or an unnamed
product that complies with requirements.
a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance with
requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following."
b. Provision of an unnamed product is not considered a substitution, if the product
complies with requirements.
5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers'
names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-6
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not
be considered unless otherwise indicated.
a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products by one of the following."
6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available
manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed or a product by an
unnamed manufacturer that complies with requirements.
a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance
with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following."
b. Provision of products of an unnamed manufacturer is not considered a substitution,
if the product complies with requirements.
7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications may additionally indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and
other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the
other named manufacturers.
a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in
Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" for substitutions for convenience.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require the phrase "match Architect's
sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample.
Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 2500 "Substitution
Procedures" for proposal of product.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies
with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from
manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's
request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following
conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record
noncompliance with the following requirements:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-7
1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is
consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is
compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those of the named
basis-of-design product. Significant product qualities include attributes, such as type,
function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability,
visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
B. Architect's Action on Comparable Products Submittal: If necessary, Architect will request
additional information or documentation for evaluation, as specified in Section 01 3300
"Submittal Procedures."
1. Form of Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures."
2. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
C. Submittal Requirements, Two-Step Process: Approval by the Architect of Contractor's request
for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply
with specified submittal requirements.
D. Submittal Requirements, Single-Step Process: When acceptable to Architect, incorporate
specified submittal requirements of individual Specification Section in combined submittal for
comparable products. Approval by the Architect of Contractor's request for use of comparable
product and of individual submittal requirements will also satisfy other submittal requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 6000
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXECUTION 01 7300-1
SECTION 01 7300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Installation of the Work.
3. Cutting and patching.
4. Progress cleaning.
5. Starting and adjusting.
6. Protection of installed construction.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for coordination of Owner-furnished products, and limits on
use of Project site.
2. Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
3. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for replacing defective work and final cleaning.
4. Section 02 4119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions
of the building.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
subsequent work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of subsequent work.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Cutting and Patching Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Prior to commencing work requiring cutting and patching, review extent of cutting and
patching anticipated and examine procedures for ensuring satisfactory result from cutting
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXECUTION 01 7300-2
and patching work. Inform Architect of scheduled meeting. Require representatives of
each entity directly concerned with cutting and patching to attend, including the
following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Trade supervisor responsible for cutting operations.
c. Trade supervisor(s) responsible for patching of each type of substrate.
d. Mechanical, electrical, and utilities subcontractors' supervisors, to the extent each
trade is affected by cutting and patching operations.
2. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve
potential conflicts before proceeding.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer, certifying that location and
elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Refer to Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements."
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, or when
encountering the need for cutting and patching of elements whose structural function is
not known, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from
Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting
and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or
decreased operational life or safety.
4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner
that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and
replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXECUTION 01 7300-3
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions for installation of specified products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of
in-place materials. Use materials that are not considered hazardous.
C. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous
to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical
systems, and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, gas service piping, and water-service piping; underground
electrical services; and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXECUTION 01 7300-4
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect in
accordance with requirements in Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks and existing conditions. If
discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. Engage a professional engineer experienced in laying out the Work, using the following
accepted surveying practices:
1. Establish limits on use of Project site.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXECUTION 01 7300-5
C. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as
indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in
unoccupied spaces, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure satisfactory results as judged
by Architect. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial
Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations, so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy of type expected for
Project.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on-site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise
levels.
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for Work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to
confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with
indicated requirements.
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size
and type required for load conditions with manufacturer.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXECUTION 01 7300-6
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed Work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect, as judged by Architect. Fit exposed connections together
to form hairline joints.
J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work.
1. Comply with Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and
replacing defective Work.
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not
to void existing warranties.
C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free
passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching in accordance with
requirements in Section 01 1000 "Summary."
F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.
G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXECUTION 01 7300-7
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable, as judged by Architect. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements
specified in other Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching
and refinishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3. Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another,
patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of
uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings
and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and
intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final
paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch, corner to corner of
wall and edge to edge of ceiling. Provide additional coats until patch blends with
adjacent surfaces.
4. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.6 COORDINATION OF OWNER'S PORTION OF THE WORK
A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.
1. Provide temporary facilities required for Owner-furnished, Contractor-installed and
Owner-furnished, Owner-installed products.
2. Refer to Section 01 1000 "Summary" for other requirements for Owner-furnished,
Contractor-installed and Owner-furnished, Owner-installed products
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXECUTION 01 7300-8
3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly.
Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where Work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from
damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 7419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXECUTION 01 7300-9
3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 4000
"Quality Requirements."
3.9 PROTECTION AND REPAIR OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Repair Work previously completed and subsequently damaged during construction period.
Repair to like-new condition.
C. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain
undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the
Work.
D. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION 01 7300
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419-1
SECTION 01 7419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials and other solid waste
resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste
includes packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials resulting from
demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal of demolition or construction waste and subsequent salvage, sale, recycling,
or deposit in landfill, incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, or designated
spoil areas on Owner’s property.
D. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets,
receipts, and invoices.
B. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and
invoices.
C. Refrigerant Recovery: Comply with requirements in Section 02 4119 "Selective Demolition" for
refrigerant recovery submittals.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419-2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Comply with requirements in Section 02 4119
"Selective Demolition."
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with transportation and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
C. Waste Management Conference(s): Conduct conference(s) at Project site to comply with
requirements in Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and
procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of each contractor
and waste management coordinator.
2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its
disposition.
3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of
containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and
disposal facilities.
5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Metals: Separate metals by type.
1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.
2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
3. Remove items below and deliver to Owner-designated recycling facility. Items to be
removed for recycling include:
a. Black iron pipe.
b. Copper wire and tubing.
3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged or recycled, remove waste materials from
Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419-3
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged or recycled, remove waste materials and
legally dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner’s property.
C. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
END OF SECTION 01 7419
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-1
SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.
2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
5. Repair of the Work.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 7839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. List of Incomplete Items: Contractor-prepared list of items to be completed or corrected,
prepared for the Architect's use prior to Architect's inspection, to determine if the Work is
substantially complete.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent.
B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-2
C. Field Report: For pest-control inspection.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items required by
other Sections.
1.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected (Contractor's "punch list"), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons
why the Work is incomplete.
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction,
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including Project
Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys,
property surveys, and similar final record information.
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,
spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by
Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number.
a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of
maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item
and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature
for receipt of submittals.
5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records.
6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-3
5. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services.
6. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
responders.
7. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
8. Complete final cleaning requirements.
9. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate
visual defects.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after
inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is
completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final
Completion.
1.8 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining Final
Completion, complete the following:
1. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed
and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
2. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
3. Submit pest-control final inspection report.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of
10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On
receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection
or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.
1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is
completed or corrected.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-4
1.9 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor,
listed by room or space number.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for
ceilings, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
4. Submit list of incomplete items in one of the following formats:
a. MS Excel Electronic File: Architect will return annotated file.
b. PDF Electronic File: Architect will return annotated file.
c. Web-Based Project Software Upload: Utilize software feature for creating and
updating list of incomplete items (punch list).
1.10 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial
Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under
warranty.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of
designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project
Manual.
D. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete
warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling
navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.
E. Warranties in Paper Form:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-5
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
F. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous
to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.
b. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
c. Clean exposed hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films,
and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior
surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-6
d. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, and similar spaces.
e. Clean flooring, removing debris, dirt, and staining; clean according to
manufacturer's recommendations.
f. Vacuum and mop concrete.
g. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
i. Remove labels that are not permanent.
j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
k. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
l. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
m. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.
n. Clean luminaires, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
o. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste-disposal requirements in Section 01 5000
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations required by Section 01 7300 "Execution" before
requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.
B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.
1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and
identification.
2. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-7
3. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.
END OF SECTION 01 7700
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839-1
SECTION 01 7839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
4. Miscellaneous record submittals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 7300 "Execution" for final property survey.
2. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
3. Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda
and contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.
1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-
keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit
one paper copy of each submittal.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839-2
E. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record
documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions,
field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839-3
B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
2. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy.
1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and
title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839-4
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy.
1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section
number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents (referred to as “as-builts” in General
Conditions) for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration
and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal
working hours.
B. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they
occur; do not wait until end of Project.
C. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
PART 4 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 5 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 7839
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119-1
SECTION 02 4119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy
requirements, and phasing requirements.
2. Section 01 7300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated
to be salvaged or reinstalled.
B. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise
indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119-2
5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.
B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures
proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate
proposed locations and construction of barriers.
C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's on-site operations are
uninterrupted.
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Use of elevator and stairs.
5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction,
including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition
operations. Submit before Work begins.
E. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion
of selective demolition.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119-3
2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so
as not to void existing warranties.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and
hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing
conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.
B. Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to
determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned
collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition
operations.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119-4
1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
demolition activities.
C. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
photographs or video and templates.
1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged for reinstallation.
Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by salvage operations.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling
specified in Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Dust Control: Use temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and
dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.
1. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
2. Cleaning: Clean adjacent improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
C. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as
required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and
finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of
construction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
D. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119-5
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices
during flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
7. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in
Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain
and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts.
B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them according
to Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119-6
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
1. Clean roadways of debris caused by debris transport.
END OF SECTION 02 4119
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-1
SECTION 05 1200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Structural steel.
2. Shear stud connectors.
3.2. Shrinkage-resistant grout.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05 3100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear stud connectors through
deck.
2. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to
structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications ,and other steel items not defined
as structural steel.
3. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for painting requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in
ANSI/AISC 303.
. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as "SLRS" or
along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and
their connections.
. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows:
0. Shapes included in ASTM A6/A6M with flanges thicker than 1-1/2 inches.
0. Column base plates thicker than 2 inches.
. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as "protected
zone" on Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elements to protected zones are
limited.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-2
. Demand-Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significant
degradation of the strength and stiffness of the seismic-load-resisting system and which are
indicated as "demand critical" or "seismic critical" on Drawings.
1.101.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction
without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and
directions for installation.
1.111.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.121.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Structural-steel materials.
2. High-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies.
3. Shear stud connectors.
4. Anchor rods.
5. Threaded rods.
6. Forged-steel hardware.
7.6. Slide bearings.
8.7. Shop primer.
9.8. Galvanized-steel primer.
10.9. Shrinkage-resistant grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment Drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed
and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.
5. Identify members and connections of the seismic-load-resisting system.
6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones.
7. Identify demand-critical welds.
8. Identify members not to be shop primed.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-3
C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs):
Provide in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for each welded joint qualified by testing,
including the following:
1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage).
2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand-critical welds.
1.131.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, and testing agency.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D. Mill test reports for structural-steel materials, including chemical and physical properties.
E. Product Test Reports: For the following:
1. Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
2. Direct-tension indicators.
3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies.
4. Shear stud connectors.
F. Survey of existing conditions.
G. Source quality-control reports.
H. Field quality-control reports.
1.141.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality
Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category BU or is accredited
by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (Acceptance Criteria 172).
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who complies with the AISC Quality Certification
Program (or Equal) and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector (or Equal), Category ACSE or
Category CSE (or Equal).
1. Installers that are not AISC certified shall provide documentation, prior to bid, showing
an equal level of certification and a list of recent projects of similar size and type. A list
of approved alternate-AISC installers will be issued to the bidding Contractors by
Addenda.
B. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified in accordance with AISC's Sophisticated Paint
Endorsement P1 or to SSPC-QP 3.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-4
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical
welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by
AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for
welding personnel qualification.
1.151.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers.
2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade F1852 bolt assemblies and for retesting bolt assemblies
after lubrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. ANSI/AISC 303.
2. ANSI/AISC 341.
3. ANSI/AISC 360.
4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."
B. Connection Design Information:
1. Option 1: Connection designs have been completed and connections indicated on the
Drawings.
. Moment Connections: [Type PR, partially] [Type FR, fully] restrained.
. Construction: [Moment frame] [Braced frame] [Shear wall system] [Combined system of
moment frame and braced frame] [Combined system of moment frame and shear walls]
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-5
[Combined system of braced frame and shear walls] [Combined system of moment frame,
braced frame, and shear walls].
2.42.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel
products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not
less than the following:
1. W-Shapes: 60 percent.
2. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: 60 percent.
3. Plate and Bar: 25 percent.
4. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 25 percent.
5. Steel Pipe: 25 percent.
6. All Other Steel Materials: 25 percent.
B. W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M.
C. Channels, Angles: ASTM A36/A36M.
D. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36/A36M.
E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B C structural tubing.
F. Steel Castings: ASTM A216/A216M, Grade WCB, with supplementary requirement S11.
G. Steel Forgings: ASTM A668/A668M.
H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.52.3 BOLTS AND CONNECTORS
A. High-Strength A325 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325, Type 1,
heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and
ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F959/F959M, Type 325-1, compressible-washer type
with plain finish.
. High-Strength A490 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A490, Type 1,
heavy-hex steel structural bolts or Grade F2280 tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies
with splined ends; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and
ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
0. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F959/F959M, Type 490-1, compressible-washer type
with plain finish.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-6
. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F3125/F3125M,
Grade F1852, Type 1, heavy-hex head assemblies, consisting of steel structural bolts with
splined ends; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M,
Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
0. Finish: Plain Mechanically deposited zinc coating.
. Shear Stud Connectors: ASTM A108, AISI C-1015 through C-1020, headed-stud type, cold-
finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
2.112.4 RODS
A. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, straight.
1. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy-hex carbon steel.
2. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel.
3. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
4. Finish: Plain.
B. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36/A36M.
1. Nuts: ASTM A63 heavy-hex carbon steel.
2. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
3. Finish: Plain.
2.12 FORGED-STEEL STRUCTURAL HARDWARE
. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon-steel bars, ASTM A108, AISI C-
1035.
. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon-steel bars, ASTM A108, AISI C-1030.
. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon-steel bars, ASTM A108, AISI C-1018.
2.16 SLIDE BEARINGS
. Structural Slide Bearings: Low-friction assemblies, of configuration indicated, that provide
vertical transfer of loads and allow horizontal movement perpendicular to plane of expansion
joint while resisting movement within plane of expansion joint.
0. Mating Surfaces: PTFE and PTFE.
0. Coefficient of Friction: Not more than [0.03] [0.04] [0.05] [0.06] [0.10] [0.12].
0. Design Load: Not less than [2,000 psi] [5,000 psi] [6,000 psi].
Total movement capability includes movement in both directions and is generally twice the dimension of
the expansion joint.
0. Total Movement Capability: 2 inches.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-7
2.232.5 PRIMER
A. Steel Primer:
1. Comply with Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."
2.242.6 SHRINKAGE-RESISTANT GROUT
A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, metallic
aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute
working time.
B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged,
nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency
suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
2.252.7 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate in
accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and to ANSI/AISC 360.
1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.
2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
3. Identify high-strength structural steel in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M and maintain
markings until structural-steel framing has been erected.
4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-
priming operations.
B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to
metal surfaces.
D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted in accordance with
SSPC-SP 3.
F. Shear Stud Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear
connectors. Weld using automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors in accordance
with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.
G.F. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-
opening framing to be attached to structural-steel frame. Straighten as required to provide
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-8
uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. Build up welded framing, weld
exposed joints continuously, and grind smooth.
H.G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to
pass through steel members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes
or enlarge holes by burning.
2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to
steel surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
2.262.8 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification
for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances,
appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
2.272.9 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches.
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
B. Surface Preparation of Steel: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the following specifications
and standards:
1. SSPC-SP 3.
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and
exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-9
2.282.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and
inspections.
1. Allow testing agency access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or
produced to perform tests and inspections.
2. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."
3. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections in accordance with
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished
weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94/E94M.
4. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear stud connectors in
accordance with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:
a. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-
degree flash or welding repairs to any shear stud connector.
b. Conduct tests in accordance with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional
shear stud connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear stud connectors already
tested.
5. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces
and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.
1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods,
bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and
elevations.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural
steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-10
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction and structural-
steel framing until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and in accordance with
ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360.
B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces
of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface
of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before
packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack shrinkage-resistant grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates, so
no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply
with manufacturer's written installation instructions for grouting.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within ANSI/AISC 303.
D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in
permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. Slope roof framing members to slopes
indicated on Drawings.
2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean
temperature when structure is completed and in service.
E. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut
sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for bolt and joint type specified.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-11
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M[ and AWS D1.8/D1.8M] for tolerances,
appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
1. Comply with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of
temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in ANSI/AISC 303 for mill material.
3.5 REPAIR
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing, and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.
B. Touchup Painting:
1. Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing, and
paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for
touching up shop-painted surfaces.
a. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3
power-tool cleaning.
2. Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform the following special
inspections:
1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details.
2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds.
3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
1. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."
2. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
a. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds in accordance with
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's
option:
1) Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-12
2) Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not
accepted.
3) Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164.
4) Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94/E94M.
END OF SECTION 05 1200
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STEEL DECKING 05 3100-1
SECTION 05 3100 - STEEL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Composite floor deck.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors.
2. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel
shapes.
3. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting
of deck.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Composite floor deck.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans,
cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.
C. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of
the following complies with requirements:
1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STEEL DECKING 05 3100-2
D. Research Reports: For steel deck, from ICC-ES.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M,
"Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof
covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to
AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members."
2.2 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. ASC Profiles, Inc.
2. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc.
3. Cordeck.
4.1. DACS, Inc.
5.2. Epic Metals Corporation.
6. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.
7.3. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.
8.4. Nucor Corp.
9. Roof Deck, Inc.
10.5. Verco Decking, Inc., a Nucor company.
. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and
interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STEEL DECKING 05 3100-3
Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated,
and with the following:
0. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS),
Grade 33, G60 zinc coating; with unpainted top surface and cleaned and pretreated
bottom surface primed with manufacturer's standard white baked-on, rust-inhibitive
primer.
0. Profile Depth: As indicated.
0. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.
0. Span Condition: As indicated.
2.82.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements
indicated.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically
driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel
screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000
psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of
profile indicated or required for application.
F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material,
finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.
G. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck.
H. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch thick, with factory-
punched hole of 3/8-inch minimum diameter.
I. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780/A780M.
J. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STEEL DECKING 05 3100-4
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in
SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.
C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned
and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract
side-lap interlocks.
E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting
through or adjacent to deck.
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical
fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DECK
A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface
diameter indicated and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch, nominal.
2. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated.
3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between
supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 36 inches, and as
follows:
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.
2. Mechanically clinch or button punch.
3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch-long welds.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches, with end joints as follows:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) STEEL DECKING 05 3100-5
1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum.
D. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck,
according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and
sides of deck.
E. Install piercing hanger tabs at 14 inches apart in both directions, within 9 inches of walls at
ends, and not more than 12 inches from walls at sides unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 REPAIR
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck
with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780/A780M and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Repair Painting:
1. Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-
painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.
2. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of
deck exposed to view.
3. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of bottom deck surfaces are included in
Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."
4. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of
both deck surfaces are included in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 05 3100
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-1
SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
3. Metal ships' ladders (roof ladder).
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are
compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.
2. Fasteners.
3. Shop primers.
4. Shrinkage-resisting grout.
5. Metal ships' ladders.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections,
and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Provide Shop Drawings for the following:
1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-2
2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
3. Metal ships' ladders.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer's experience with providing delegated-design
engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that engineer is licensed in
the jurisdiction in which Project is located.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D. Research Reports: For post-installed anchors.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Fabricator and Erector Qualifications: Fabricator and Erector with minimum of 5 years’
experience in performing the work of this section. The fabricator and erector shall submit
1. Fabricator shall submit certifications that they are registered and approved by the
building official, in accordance with 2000 IBC Chapter 17, and participate in an approved
AISC quality control program to the design professional and structural engineer for
written approval, prior to the start of work.
2. The fabricator shall participate regularly in the third party quality control program of
AISC and be registered and approved by the building official in accordance with 2000
IBC Chapter 17.
3. Fabricator shall also be acceptable to the structural engineer.
a. As an alternate to the requirements above, Contractor will pay for full-time
inspection during the fabrication of the project steel. This inspection will be
conducted by the Owner’s inspection company (at the fabrication plant).
4. Fabrication plant acceptable and approved in writing by the structural engineer, design
professional, and building official.
5. Do not proceed with work until the design professional has provided final written
approval.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-3
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, floor slabs, decks, and other construction
contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 4000
"Quality Requirements," to design ladders.
2.2 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, cold-formed steel tubing.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A48/A48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use
and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M,
Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325, Type 3, heavy-
hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH3, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and where
indicated, flat washers.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563; and,
where indicated, flat washers.
E. Anchors, General: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load
imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-4
concrete, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
F. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M.
D. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Provide grout specifically
recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-5
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent
construction.
1. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with primer specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior
Painting."
2.7 METAL SHIPS' LADDERS
A. Provide metal ships' ladders where indicated. Fabricate of open-type construction with channel
or plate stringers and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and
fittings for installation.
1. Treads shall be not less than 5 inches exclusive of nosing or less than 8-1/2 inches
including the nosing, and riser height shall be not more than 9-1/2 inches.
2. Fabricate ships' ladders, including railings from steel.
3. Fabricate treads from welded or pressure-locked steel bar grating. Limit openings in
gratings to no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension.
4. Comply with applicable railing requirements in Section 05 5213 "Pipe and Tube
Railings."
B. Prime steel ships' ladders, including treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners, with primer
specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."
2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-6
B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Shop prime iron and steel items prior to its delivery to the job site unless they are to be
embedded in concrete, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting".
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for
use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and
other connectors.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000-7
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
3.3 REPAIRS
A. Touchup Painting:
1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas.
Paint uncoated and abraded areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
a. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
2. Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint are specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."
END OF SECTION 05 5000
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 5323-1
SECTION 07 5323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Adhered ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer (EPDM) roofing system, patching, and
tying into existing roof as required to install indicated equipment.
2. Vapor retarder.
3. Roof insulation.
4. Cover board.
5. Walkways.
B. Provide materials compatible with and matching existing roof assembly.
C. Remove only as much of the existing roof assembly as required to install new construction and
to provide positive drainage around new curbs and equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" apply to work of this Section.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing
Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, air barrier Installer,
and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof
accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes, including flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 5323-2
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. For insulation and roof system component fasteners, include copy of FM Approvals'
RoofNav listing.
B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including
the following:
1. Layout and thickness if insulation.
2. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
3. Flashing details at penetrations.
4. Tapered insulation, thickness, and slopes.
5. Roof plan showing orientation of roof membrane and fastening spacings and patterns for
mechanically fastened roofing system.
6. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Roof membrane and flashings of color required.
D. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofing system, indicating compliance with wind uplift
performance requirements.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer Certificates:
1. Performance Requirement Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying
that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"
Article.
a. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements.
2. Special Warranty Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that all
materials supplied under this Section are acceptable for special warranty.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 5323-3
C. Product Test Reports: For components of roof membrane and insulation, for tests performed by
a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with specified requirements.
D. Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.
1. Field Test Reports:
2. Fastener-pullout test results and manufacturer's revised requirements for fastener
patterns.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Certified statement from existing roof membrane manufacturer stating that existing roof
warranty has not been affected by Work performed under this Section.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed and listed in FM
Approvals' RoofNav for roofing system identical to that used for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing
system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's special warranty.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or
listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid
material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated
shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 5323-4
D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Special warranty includes roof membrane, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover
boards, and other components of roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 20 years from Date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this
Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of
roofing system such as roof membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards,
vapor retarders, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: Two years from Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed roofing system and base flashings shall withstand specified
uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and
flashings shall remain watertight.
1. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when
tested according to ASTM G152, ASTM G154, or ASTM G155.
2. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to
ASTM D3746, ASTM D4272, or the Resistance to Foot Traffic Test in FM
Approvals 4470.
B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent
materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof
membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
A. FM Approvals' RoofNav Listing: Roof membrane, base flashings, and component materials
shall comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 or FM Approvals 4470 as part of a
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 5323-5
roofing system, and shall be listed in FM Approvals' RoofNav for Class 1 or noncombustible
construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals Certification markings.
1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.
2. Hail-Resistance Rating: FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-34 MH.
B. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes
indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
2.2 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-TERPOLYMER (EPDM) ROOFING
A. EPDM Sheet: ASTM D4637/D4637M, Type II, scrim or fabric internally reinforced, EPDM
sheet.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
b. Firestone Building Products.
c. Versico Roofing Systems.
2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.
3. Exposed Face Color: Black.
4. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from roof membrane
manufacturer or manufacturers approved by roof membrane manufacturer.
2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with other roofing components.
1. Adhesive and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and
that comply with the following limits for VOC content:
a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
e. Contact Adhesives: 80 g/L.
f. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.
g. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L.
h. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
i. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
j. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
k. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil-thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 5323-6
C. Protection Sheet: Epichlorohydrin or neoprene nonreinforced flexible sheet, 55 to 60 mils thick,
recommended by EPDM manufacturer for resistance to hydrocarbons, non-aromatic solvents,
grease, and oil.
D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.
E. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based.
F. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch-wide
minimum, butyl splice tape with release film.
G. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single-component sealant, colored to match membrane
roofing.
H. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.
I. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,
approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.
J. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-
resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening components to substrate,
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
K. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,
molded pipe boot flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced
EPDM securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and
other accessories.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Self-Adhering-Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM D1970/D1970M, polyethylene film laminated to
layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive, minimum 40-mil-total thickness; maximum permeance
rating of 0.1 perm; cold applied, with slip-resisting surface and release paper backing. Provide
primer when recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.
1. Provide vapor barrier only if required to match existing assembly.
2.5 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by EPDM roof membrane
manufacturer, approved for use in FM Approvals' RoofNav-listed roof assemblies.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber
mat facer on both major surfaces.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 5323-7
a. Atlas EPS; a Division of Atlas Roofing Corporation.
b. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
c. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
d. Firestone Building Products.
e. Flex Membrane International Corp.
f. GAF.
g. Hunter Panels.
h. Insulfoam; Carlisle Construction Materials Company.
i. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
j. Rmax, Inc.
2. Compressive Strength: 25 psi.
3. Size: 48 by 48 inches.
4. Thickness:
a. Base Layer: 1-1/2 inches.
b. Upper Layer: Thickness as required to comply with required minimum R-value.
C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards.
1. Material: Match roof insulation.
2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch.
3. Slope:
a. Roof Field: 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
b. Saddles and Crickets: 1/2 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use
and compatibility with other roofing system components.
1. Provide coverboard only if required to match existing assembly.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-
resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover
boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof
insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:
1. Full-spread, spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive.
2. Adhesives and sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:
a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
e. Contact Adhesives: 80 g/L.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 5323-8
f. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.
g. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L.
h. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
i. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
j. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
k. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
D. Cover Board: ASTM C1177/C1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, or
ASTM C1278/C1278M, fiber-reinforced gypsum board.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; Dens Deck Prime.
b. National Gypsum Company; DEXcell Glass Mat Roof Board.
c. USG Corporation; Securock Glass-Fiber Roof Board.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
3. Surface Finish: Factory primed.
2.7 WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: 60 mil EPDM membrane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and
roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with
requirements in Section 05 3100 "Steel Decking."
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing system
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 5323-9
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
C. Perform fastener-pullout tests according to roof system manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Submit test result within 24 hours of performing tests.
a. Include manufacturer's requirements for any revision to previously submitted
fastener patterns required to achieve specified wind uplift requirements.
D. Install sound-absorbing insulation strips according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, FM
Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data
Sheet 1-29.
B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast.
Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
C. Install roof membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain
weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER
A. Self-Adhering-Sheet Vapor Retarder: Prime substrate if required by manufacturer. Install self-
adhering-sheet vapor retarder over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each
sheet a minimum of 3-1/2 and 6 inches, respectively.
1. Extend vertically up parapet walls and projections to a minimum height equal to height of
insulation and cover board.
2. Seal laps by rolling.
B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air
movement into roofing system.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or
left exposed at end of workday.
B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing
roof insulation.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 5323-10
C. Installation Over Metal Decking:
1. Install base layer of insulation with joints staggered not less than 24 inches in adjacent
rows.
a. Locate end joints over crests of decking.
b. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers,
install noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if
applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer.
c. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to
intersecting sloping roof decks.
d. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width.
e. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each
side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.
1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
f. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
g. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
h. Mechanically attach base layer of insulation using mechanical fasteners
specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to
metal decks.
1) Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' RoofNav for
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
2) Fasten insulation to resist specified uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and
field of roof.
2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation with joints of each layer offset not
less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation.
a. Staggered end joints within each layer not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows.
b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to
intersecting sloping roof decks.
c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width.
d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each
side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.
e. Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
f. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
g. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
h. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to FM
Approvals' RoofNav listed roof assembly requirements for specified Windstorm
Resistance Classification and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-
29, as follows:
1) Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation
adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 5323-11
3.6 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARDS
A. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints
staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each
direction.
1. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to
intersecting sloping roof decks.
2. At internal roof drains, conform to slope of drain sump.
a. Trim cover board so that water flow is unrestricted.
3. Cut and fit cover board tight to nailers, projections, and penetrations.
4. Adhere cover board to substrate using adhesive according to FM Approvals' RoofNav
listed roof assembly requirements for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification and
FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29, as follows:
a. Set cover board in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly
pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
B. Install slip sheet over cover board and immediately beneath roofing.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF ADHERED ROOF MEMBRANE
A. Adhere roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Unroll membrane roof membrane and allow to relax before installing.
C. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.
D. Accurately align roof membrane, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
E. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roof membrane at rate required by
manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roof membrane. Do not apply to splice
area of roof membrane.
F. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roof membrane securely at terminations,
penetrations, and perimeters.
G. Apply roof membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
H. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement.
1. Firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roof membrane to ensure a watertight seam
installation.
2. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing terminations.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 5323-12
3. Apply a continuous bead of in-seam sealant before closing splice if required by roofing
system manufacturer.
I. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roof membrane that do not comply with requirements.
J. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roof
membrane in place with clamping ring.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF BASE FLASHING
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow
to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping
sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of
sheet flashing terminations.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Install EPDM walkway according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install flexible walkways at the following locations:
a. Perimeter of each rooftop unit.
b. Between each rooftop unit location, creating a continuous path connecting rooftop
unit locations.
c. Between each roof access ladder and each rooftop unit location or path connecting
rooftop unit locations.
d. Locations indicated on Drawings.
e. As required by roof membrane manufacturer's warranty requirements.
2. Provide 6-inch clearance between adjoining pads.
3. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing
system manufacturer's written instructions.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 5323-13
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface
preparation, roof membrane application, sheet flashings, protection, and drainage components,
and to furnish reports to Architect.
B. Perform the following tests:
1. Flood Testing: Flood test each roofing area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D5957, after completing roofing and flashing. Install temporary containment
assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.
a. Perform tests before overlying construction is placed.
b. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches with a minimum depth of 1 inch and not
exceeding a depth of 4 inches. Maintain 2 inches of clearance from top of base
flashing.
c. Flood each area for 24 hours.
d. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until
roofing and flashing installations are watertight.
1) Cost of retesting is Contractor's responsibility.
e. Testing agency shall prepare survey report indicating locations initial leaks, if any,
and final survey report.
2. Testing agency shall prepare survey report indicating locations of initial discontinuities, if
any.
C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion, in presence of Architect, and to prepare inspection report.
D. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that
they do not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if
replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.
3.11 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When
remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing system, inspect roofing system for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 5323-14
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 07 5323
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-1
SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Urethane joint sealants.
2. Latex joint sealants.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-2
C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by
manufacturer.
B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the
testing indicated.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or
replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from
the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Content: Sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following:
1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of
250 g/L or less.
3. Sealants and sealant primers for porous substrates shall have a VOC content of 775 g/L
or less.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and
minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Corporation; MasterSeal CR 195 (Pre-2014: Sonolastic Ultra).
b. Bostik, Inc; Chem-Calk 900.
c. ER Systems; an ITW Company; Pacific Polymers Elasto-Thane 230 MP.
d. Everkem Diversified Products, Inc.; AcuraSeal 50 Year Acrylic Urethane Caulk.
e. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL.
f. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants; Sikaflex Textured Sealant.
2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Everkem Diversified Products, Inc.; SilTex 40 Siliconized Acryllic Latex Caulk.
b. Franklin International; Titebond UA 920 Sealant.
c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20.
2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants,
primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer
based on field experience and laboratory testing.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-4
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Adfast; Adseal BR 2600.
b. Alcot Plastics Ltd.; ALCOT Standard Backer Rod.
c. BASF Corporation; MasterSeal 920 & 921(Pre-2014: Sonolastic Backer Rod).
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),
and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-5
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Masonry.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-
sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and
replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-6
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide flush joint profile at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8B in
ASTM C1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on
Drawings according to Figure 8C in ASTM C1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and
joint substrate.
b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each
floor per elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C1521.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;
extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure
for opposite side.
3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
requirements.
c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of
product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion
complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-7
4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were
installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints
were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant
configuration, and sealant dimensions.
5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures
used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new
sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants
immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces
not subject to significant movement.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200-8
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
END OF SECTION 07 9200
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-1
SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Exterior standard steel doors and frames.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to
NAAMM-HMMA 803 or ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door type.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-2
2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Finishes: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3
by 5 inches.
2. Fabrication: Prepare Samples approximately 12 by 12 inches to demonstrate compliance
with requirements for quality of materials and construction:
a. Doors: Show vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; and
hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement. Include separate section showing
glazing if applicable.
b. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include
separate section showing fixed hollow-metal panels and glazing if applicable.
D. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of
supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each type of for tests performed by a qualified testing agency
indicating compliance with performance requirements.
B. Field quality control reports.
1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and
number to which door accesses.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection
during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-3
C. Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place
on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each
stacked door to permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY.
2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY.
3. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
4. Mesker Door Inc.
5. MPI Group, LLC (The).
6. Pioneer Industries.
7. Republic Doors and Frames.
8. Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc.
9. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Thermally Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door assemblies with U-factor of not more than
0.38 deg Btu/F x h x sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM C518.
2.3 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials,
fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as
specified.
B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 3; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level A.
1. Doors:
a. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
b. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (nominal 16
gage), with minimum A40 coating.
c. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.
d. Edge Bevel: Bevel lock and hinge edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
e. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material
as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration.
f. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same
material as face sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to
permit moisture to escape.
g. Core: Polyisocyanurate.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-4
2. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (nominal
16 gage), with minimum A40 coating.
b. Construction: Full profile welded.
3. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.4 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame
standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.
2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames
with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height
above 7 feet.
3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter bolts with expansion
shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer.
B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor.
C. Material: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M
or ASTM A1011/A1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M,
Class B.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M.
C. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting
of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion
characteristics.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations
require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or
angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-5
1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated
mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling,
and tapping according to ANSI/SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for
hardware.
2.7 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;
compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed.
B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hollow-metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without
damage to completed Work.
a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by
welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush,
and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes.
b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113-6
2. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
3. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
4. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances
specified below.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
3.3 REPAIR
A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 08 1113
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9113-1
SECTION 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT#4S
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
exterior substrates:
1. Galvanized metal.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 5 (semigloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
2. Indicate VOC content.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9113-2
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. PPG Paints.
2. Rodda Paint Co.
3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the
Exterior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.
1. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 6000 “Product Requirements” and
Section 01 2500 “Substitution Procedures.”
2. Equivalent Products: Substitutions of comparable products by other manufacturers will
be considered prior to bid if the product complies with specified product requirements
and is the same in quality and appearance to the specified product, as judged solely by the
Architect.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9113-3
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated. Products shall be listed in
its "MPI Approved Products Lists" unless indicated otherwise.
1. Substitutions of products not listed on the “MPI Approved Products Lists" may be
considered if product data for the product is provided that clearly indicates that the
product meets or exceeds all MPI requirements.
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. VOC Content: For field applications, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits
of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L.
4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.
5. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L.
6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 100 g/L.
7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If
paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at
Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying
paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with
rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from
previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are
incompatible.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9113-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing
finishes and primers.
C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop
paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by
mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of
subsequently applied paints.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9113-5
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door
frames.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXT 5.3J:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9113-6
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.
1) PPG Architectural: High Performance Coatings; Pitt-Tech Plus 4020 PF /
Devflex 4020 PF - 4020 1000.
2) Rodda Paint Co.: Prime Solutions; First Coat Bonding Primer - 501601.
3) Sherwin-Williams: Pro Industrial; Pro-Cryl Universal Primer - B66W1310.
b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5), MPI #163.
1) Rodda Paint Co.: PROTECH High Performance; Multi Master VST
Semigloss - 448901.
2) Sherwin-Williams: Pro Industrial; DTM Semi-Gloss - B66W01151.
END OF SECTION 09 9113
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123-1
SECTION 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1. Steel and iron.
2. Galvanized metal.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 5 (semigloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
2. Indicate VOC content.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123-2
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. PPG Paints.
2. Rodda Paint Co.
3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the
Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.
1. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 6000 “Product Requirements” and
Section 01 2500 “Substitution Procedures.”
2. Equivalent Products: Substitutions of comparable products by other manufacturers will
be considered prior to bid if the product complies with specified product requirements
and is the same in quality and appearance to the specified product, as judged solely by the
Architect.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123-3
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated. Products shall be listed in
its "MPI Approved Products Lists" unless indicated otherwise.
1. Substitutions of products not listed on the “MPI Approved Products Lists" may be
considered if product data for the product is provided that clearly indicates that the
product meets or exceeds all MPI requirements.
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and
coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the
following VOC content limits:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L.
4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.
5. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L.
6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 100 g/L.
7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If
paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at
Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying
paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with
rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from
previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are
incompatible.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing
finishes and primers.
C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:
1. SSPC-SP 3.
E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop
paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by
mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of
subsequently applied paints.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123-5
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123-6
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Steel Substrates:
1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI INT 5.1B:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107.
1) Dunn-Edwards: ENDURAPRIME: Interior /Exterior Acrylic Rust
Preventative Metal Primer - ENPR00.
2) Sherwin-Williams: Pro Industrial: Pro-Cryl Universal Primer - B66W01310.
b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5), MPI #153.
1) PPG Architectural: PPG; Advantage 900 Int/Ext Trim & Door Semi-Gloss -
919-10 Series.
2) Rodda Paint Co.: Rodda Paint Co.; Protech Pre-catalyzed Epoxy Semigloss
– 449001.
3) Sherwin-Williams: Pro Industrial; Pro Industrial Pre-Cat Epoxy Semi-Gloss
- K46W01151.
B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI INT 5.3K:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.
1) PPG Architectural: High Performance Coatings; Pitt-Tech Plus 4020 PF /
Devflex 4020 PF - 4020 1000.
2) Rodda Paint Co.: Prime Solutions; First Coat Bonding Primer - 501601.
3) Sherwin-Williams: Pro Industrial; Pro-Cryl Universal Primer - B66W1310.
b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5), MPI #153.
1) PPG Architectural: PPG; Advantage 900 Int/Ext Trim & Door Semi-Gloss -
919-10 Series.
2) Rodda Paint Co.: Rodda Paint Co.; Protech Pre-catalyzed Epoxy Semigloss
– 449001.
3) Sherwin-Williams: Pro Industrial; Pro Industrial Pre-Cat Epoxy Semi-Gloss
- K46W01151.
END OF SECTION 09 9123
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0000 - 1
SECTION 23 0000 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
Sections of other Divisions which relate to mechanical work apply to the work of this
section. See various Sections on sitework, underfloor work, structural work, finish
materials, etc.
B. Related Sections: Refer to “Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment” Section
in Division 23 for basic electrical requirements for all mechanical equipment. Special
and specific electrical requirements are specified within each respective equipment
specification section.
1.2 SUMMARY: This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and
includes requirements common to more than one section of Division 23. It expands and
supplements the requirements of Division 01.
This Division does not define, nor is it limited by, trade jurisdictions. All work described herein
is a part of the General Contract and is required of the Contractor regardless.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT: The mechanical work described in these mechanical
specifications is for a project located at Brigham Young University Idaho in Rexburg, Idaho.
Design weather conditions are: 89o db, 61o wb, and winter -30oF. Altitude readings, unless
otherwise noted, are for an elevation of 4,950 feet above sea level. Make adjustment to
manufacturer's performance data as needed.
1.4 CODES AND PERMITS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION:
A. The mechanical work shall be performed in strict accordance with the applicable
provisions of the various codes, ordinances and adoptions pertaining to the project
location in effect on the date of invitation for bids. All materials and labor necessary to
comply with rules, regulations and ordinances shall be provided. Where the drawings
and/or specifications indicate materials or construction in excess of code requirements,
the drawings and/or specifications shall govern.
B. The Contractor shall hold and save the Owner and Architect/Engineer free and harmless
from liability of any nature or kind arising from his failure to comply with codes and
ordinances.
C. Permits necessary for the prosecution of the work under this contract shall be secured and
paid for by the contractor(s) include connection fees related to utility hookups.
Contractor shall include all sewer connection fees and shall verify current rate with
Rexburg City prior to bid.
D. REFERENCE STANDARDS:
American Welding Society
International Mechanical Code/State Code
International Building Code/State Code
International Energy Conservation Code
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0000 - 2
SMACNA Duct Design Standards
Local/State Plumbing Code
Locally enforced NFPA Codes
Local Fuel Utility Regulations
Local Power Utility Regulations
American Gas Association
ASME Codes for Pressure Vessels and Piping
ANSI B31.1 Piping
E. Final inspection by the Architect/Engineer will not be made nor Certificate of Substantial
Completion issued until certificates of acceptability from the Authorities having
jurisdiction are delivered.
1.5 DEFINITION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The mechanical drawings at reduced scale
show the general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc., and shall be followed as
closely as the actual building construction and the work of other trades will permit. The
architectural and structural drawings shall be considered as part of the work insofar as these
drawings furnish the Contractor with information relating to design and construction of the
building. Architectural drawings shall take precedence over mechanical drawings. Request
clarification and participate in resolution in the event of conflict.
Because of the small scale of the mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings and accessories which may be required. Investigate the structural and finish conditions
affecting the work and arrange the work accordingly, providing such extensions, fittings, valves
and accessories to meet the conditions as may be required. Some small scale work is not shown
such as control conduit and piping, incidental piping, specialties. Provide as directed by note or
specification.
Examine the actual construction site prior to bidding and obtain an understanding of the
conditions under which the work will be performed. No allowances will be made for failure to
make such examination.
During construction, verify the dimensions governing the mechanical work at the building. No
extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed because of differences between actual dimensions
and those indicated on the drawings. Examine adjoining work on which mechanical work is
dependent for perfect efficiency, and report any work of other trades which must be corrected.
No waiver of responsibility for defective work shall be claimed nor allowed due to failure to
report unfavorable conditions affecting the mechanical work.
1.6 ROUGH-IN:
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of
the actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 02 through 35 for rough-in requirements.
1.7 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS:
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building
components.
B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for
mechanical installations.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0000 - 3
D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured
in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment
for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring
positioning prior to closing-in the building.
F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate installation
of mechanical equipment and materials.
G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and
overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
H. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of
equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of
disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
I. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceilings with
suspension systems, light fixtures, existing structures and other installations.
J. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead
utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised
service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each
service.
K. Where mechanical work penetrates other trade work such as gypboard walls, etc.,
penetration shall be neatly cut and walls shall be filled and patched.
L. All materials exposed within a return air plenum shall either be noncombustible or have a
maximum flame spread index of 25 and a max smoke developed index of 50.
1.8 ACCESSIBILITY:
A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance.
Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with
final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all
parts that require replacement or servicing.
B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location.
C. Establish required clearance to all installation features involving operation and
maintenance. Respect manufacturers recommendations for access and clearance.
D. Access Doors - General: All items of mechanical equipment which may require
adjustment, maintenance, replacement or which control a system function shall be made
readily accessible to personnel operating the building.
1. Provide access doors in all ductwork or plenums as required to maintain fire
dampers, fire smoke dampers, equipment, controls or other elements of the
system. Doors shall conform to SMACNA standards unless otherwise detailed or
specified. Refer to Section 23 33 00 for sizes.
2. Provide access doors in floors, walls, ceiling and partitions to valves, cleanouts,
chases, dampers, etc., and to access doors in ductwork requiring the same.
Access doors shall be all-steel construction equivalent to "Milcor" by Inland
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0000 - 4
Ryerson in a style approved by the Owner's Representative. Doors shall be 24" x
24" minimum, or larger as needed, with screwdriver latches.
1.9 CHANGE ORDERS: See General Conditions.
1.10 ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION/SUBSTITUTION: These documents outline a way in
which the Owner may be delivered a functional and reliable facility. Drawings and specifications
describe reasonable engineering practice for the Contractor to follow.
Coordination between trades may result in periodic needs to adjust the installation from that
indicated, but in no case shall the intended function be compromised.
The Contractor may perceive some work methods which differ from those specified which could
save time and effort. These may be presented to the Architect with a breakdown of possible cost
savings for review. Implement only with authorization.
Materials substitutions will generally be covered in a review process prior to bidding. After
bidding, substitutions shall be proposed only on the basis of definitive cost accounting and
implemented only with authorization.
1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING:
A. Lay out the project where new work is involved ahead of time, providing sleeves and
blockouts, and have work specifically formed, poured and framed to accommodate
mechanical installations. Cut and patch only as needed.
B. Refer to the Division 01 Section: CUTTING AND PATCHING for general requirements
for cutting and patching.
C. Refer to Division 26 Section: BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS for
requirements for cutting and patching electrical equipment, components, and materials.
D. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting
and patching.
E. Arrange for repairs required to restore other and any work damaged as a result of
mechanical installations.
F. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is
necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.
G. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:
1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work;
2. Remove and replace defective Work;
3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract
Documents;
4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing:
5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
H. Upon written instructions from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore Work to
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0000 - 5
provide for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed Work.
I. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and
materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of mechanical piping and
other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work.
J. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or
scheduled to be removed.
K. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread
of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
1.12 SUBMITTALS: Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only
from the Contractor to the Architect. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers
directly to the Architect/Engineer will not be processed. Document each transmittal and sign and
stamp the submittal indicating that it has been reviewed and is in compliance with the criteria of
the project, any exceptions being clearly noted.
A. Shop Drawings: As soon as possible after the contract is awarded, submit to the
Architect, electronic copies of the descriptive literature covering all equipment and
materials to be used in the installation of mechanical systems for this project. Written
confirmation of acceptable review by the Owner's Representative shall be obtained before
ordering, purchasing, acquiring or installing any such equipment or materials for the
project.
Prepare the submittals in an orderly manner after the order of this specification.
Submitted literature shall clearly indicate performance, quality, utility requirements,
dimensions of size, connection points and other information pertinent to effective review.
Equipment must fit into the available space with allowance for operation, maintenance,
etc. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for space and utility requirements for
equipment installed.
Factory-wired equipment shall include shop drawings of all internal wiring to be
furnished with unit.
Review of the Architect/Engineer is for general conformance of the submitted equipment
of the project specification; in no way does such approval relieve Contractor of his
obligation to furnish equipment and materials that comply in detail to the specification,
nor does it relieve the Contractor of his obligation to determine actual field dimensions
and conditions which may affect his work.
B. Record Drawings: During the course of construction, maintain a set of drawings,
specifications, change orders, shop drawings, addenda, etc., for reference and upon which
all deviations from the original layout are recorded. Turn these marked-up documents
over to the Architect/Engineer at the conclusion of the work so that the original tracings
can be revised. If the Contractor fails to mark up the prints, reimburse the
Architect/Engineer for time required to do so.
1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND TRAINING:
A. Refer to Section 019113.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0000 - 6
1.14 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY: The following guarantee is a part of this specification and is
binding on the part of the Contractor and his assigns:
"Contractor guarantees that this installation is in accordance with the terms of the Contract and is
free from mechanical defects. He agrees to replace or repair, to the satisfaction of the Owner's
Representative, any part of this installation which may fail or be determined unacceptable within
a period of one (1) year after final acceptance. See also the General Conditions of these
specifications. Failed equipment in the repair or replacement shall be guaranteed for one full year
from the date of recommission."
Compile and assemble the warranties required by Division 23 into a separated set of vinyl
covered, insert sheets, tabulated and indexed for each reference, included in the O & M Manual.
Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include
date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and
telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
Mechanical systems and equipment shall not be considered for substantial completion and
initiation of warranty until they have performed in service continuously without malfunction for
at least thirty (30) working days.
1.15 TESTS AND CERTIFICATIONS: Make all tests required by code or specification in the
presence of a representative of the Owner, with tests recorded and certified by the Contractor and
Representative. Involve local authorities where required.
1.16 PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES: Refer to General Conditions. See Paragraph 1.4.
1.17 CEILING SPACE COORDINATION: Carefully coordinate ceiling cavity space with all trades;
however, installation of mechanical equipment within the ceiling cavity space allocation, in the
event of conflict, shall be in the following order: plumbing waste lines; supply, return and exhaust
ductwork; domestic hot and cold water; fire protection; control conduit. Respect clearances
required for lights, electrical conduits, protected structure, etc. All spaces above any and all
ceilings shall be defined and considered as return air plenum space.
1.18 MECHANICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS: For the fan rooms, steam to heating water,
water converter room, congested areas, or areas of great detail, prepare and submit a set of
coordination drawings showing major elements, components and systems of mechanical
equipment and materials in relationship with other building components (structure, fire sprinkler,
electrical, etc.). Prepare drawings to an accurate scale of 1/4" - 1-0" or larger. Indicate the
locations of all equipment and materials, including clearances for installing and maintaining
equipment, servicing and maintaining equipment, valve stem movement, and similar
requirements. Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during
construction.
Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections and details to conclusively
coordinate and integrate all installations. Indicate locations where space is limited, and where
sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the work,
including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:
A. Customized Rooftop Air Handling Units.
1. Cooling coils, heating coils, filters, etc.
2. Relief Fans.
3. Electrical installations.
4. Related structure.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0000 - 7
B. Work in pipe spaces, chases, trenches, and tunnels.
C. Exterior wall penetrations.
D. Ceiling and floor plenums which contain piping, ductwork, or equipment in congested
arrangement. To include structure, ductwork, piping, fire protection, large electrical
conduit, recessed lights, etc.
E. Installations in mechanical riser shafts, at typical sections and crucial offsets and
junctures.
F. Pipe expansion loops.
G. Numbered valve location diagrams.
H. Exterior underground lines in common excavation.
I. Manifold piping for multiple equipment units.
J. General floor plan layouts with ductwork, piping, lighting, structure, etc.
K. Use drawings to coordinate all affected trades. Do not work without coordinated
drawings.
1.19 SCHEDULING/METHODS OF PROCEDURE: Where interruptions of service are needed to
effect work of this contract, outline the work, coordinate with other trades, determine the Owners
acceptable downtime and prepare a time based schedule to accomplish the work. Give notice of a
necessary utility interruption (or shutdown) to any existing system to the owner’s construction
coordinator not less than 72 hours prior to the proposed shutdown. This will then be coordinated
with the Campus Utility Services Department and the campus areas involved for approval to go
ahead with the shutdown or re-schedule. Set up for evening, nighttime or weekend hours as
necessary to accomplish the work with minimum disruption.
PART 2 - GENERAL MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.1 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
A. All equipment and materials shall be new, and shall be the standard products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of plumbing, heating, ventilating and
air conditioning equipment, and shall be the manufacturer's latest design. Specific
equipment shown in schedules on drawings and specified herein is to be the basis for the
Contractor's bid. Provisions for substitute equipment are outlined in the General
Conditions. All materials shall be produced by manufacturing plants located in the
United States of America.
B. Furnish and install all major items of equipment specified in the equipment schedules on
the drawings complete with all accessories normally supplied with catalog items listed,
and all other accessories necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0000 - 8
2.2 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
A. Close pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs to prevent lodgement of dirt or trash
during the course of installation. Cover equipment tightly and protect against dirt, water
and chemical or mechanical injury. Plumbing fixtures intended for the final installation
shall not be used by the construction forces. At the completion of the work, clean
fixtures, equipment and materials and polish thoroughly and deliver in a factory dock
condition for the Owner's acceptance. Make damage and defects developing before
acceptance of the work good at Contractor's expense.
B. Do not make temporary use of project equipment, new or existing, during construction
without the written consent of the owner. SYSTEMS SHALL NOT BE USED FOR
TEMPORARY HEAT.
2.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF WORKMEN:
A. All mechanics shall be capable journeymen, skilled in the work assigned to them.
Apprentices may be used with appropriate direction.
B. Employ no unskilled persons in the work which he is given to do; execute all work in a
skillful and workmanlike manner. All persons employed upon this work shall be
competent, faithful, orderly and satisfactory to the Owner. Should the Owner's
Representative deem anyone employed on the work incompetent or unfit for his duties,
and so certify, Contractor shall dismiss him and he shall not be again employed upon the
work without permission of the Owner's Representative.
C. All welders involved in welding of pressure piping systems shall be certified in
accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Written
verification of successful test completion shall be submitted to Architect prior to
initiating work.
2.4 FOREMAN: Dedicate and designate a full-time general mechanical foreman to the Owner's
Representative to be consistently available on site during the life of the project for consultation.
Do not replace this individual without prior approval from the Owner's Representative.
2.5 USE OF COMMON VENDORS: Regardless of subcontract delegations, coordinate purchasing
between trades so that equipment and materials of similar nature come from a single vendor, i.e.,
all package HVAC terminal units shall be common source. Valves, terminal boxes, speed drives,
etc., the same. Do not burden the Owner with multiple brands of similar equipment unless so
directed.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0000 - 9
2.6 ROOF/WALL/FLOOR PENETRATIONS - FLASHINGS:
A. Install sleeves through the floor into “dry rooms” flush with the floor, caulked and sealed.
Into wet rooms, extend piping to create 1" dam. Use Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe
for all pipe sleeves.
B. Let pipe sleeves allow for movement of the pipe due to expansion and contraction, yet to
include seismic restraint.
C. Refer to Section “FIRE STOPPING” for requirements.
D. Flashings:
1. Flash all pipes penetrating the roof. Provide required flashing components.
2. Clamp roof drains to roof membrane, follow manufacturer's directions.
3. Flash and counterflash other piping penetrating the roof. See drawings or
Architect/Engineer for additional detail.
4. Make all ductwork penetrating the roof watertight with flashings, counterflashing
and sealant. Provide curbs for all such openings.
2.7 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING (GENERAL):
A. Provide all excavation, trenching and backfilling for Division 23 underground piping
work. Excavation and backfilling shall comply with applicable paragraphs of Division
31. Tamp bottoms of trenches hard and, for soil and waste piping, grade to secure
uniform fall of 1/4" per foot, or as noted. Excavate bell holes for hub and spigot pipes so
that pipe rests on solid ground for its entire length. Lay sewer and water pipe in separate
trenches, except where otherwise noted, as detailed.
B. After work has been tested, inspected and approved by the Owner's Representative and/or
State/Local Inspector, and prior to backfilling, clean the excavation of all rubbish, and
clean backfill materials free of trash. Place backfill in horizontal layers not exceeding
12" in thickness, properly moistened. Mechanically compact each layer with suitable
equipment to a dry density of not less than 95 percent as determined by the Modified
AASHO Test T-18O. See Division 31 for additional requirements.
1. Provide adequate shoring to safeguard workers from cave-ins for all excavations.
2. In areas where General Contractor has finish grade work to do, Mechanical
Contractor shall backfill and compact to 8" below finish grade. Where no finish
surface work is to be done, Mechanical Contractor shall backfill and compact to
and match adjacent undisturbed surface with allowance for settling, etc.
3. Protect from damage all existing underground utilities or utility tunnels indicated
on the contract drawings (or field located for the Contractor by the Owner prior
to excavation operations). Any damage to identified existing utilities or utility
tunnels shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (GENERAL):
A. Provide hangers and/or supports for all equipment, piping and ductwork. Primary
information is contained in these specifications and on the drawings.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0000 - 10
B. Provide hangers and supports to correlate with seismic restraint and vibration isolation.
2.9 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: Install all equipment in strict accordance with directions
and recommendations furnished by the manufacturer. Where such directions are in conflict with
the plans and specifications, report such conflicts to the Architect who shall direct adjustments as
deemed necessary and desirable.
2.10 LUBRICATION: Lubricate equipment at startup. Then, provide all lubricants for the operation
of all equipment until acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor is held responsible for all
damage to equipment and bearings while the equipment is being operated by him consequent to
preacceptance operation.
2.11 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONTROL:
A. In general, motor starters, related motor starter equipment and power wiring indicated on
the electrical drawings and control diagrams are to be furnished and installed under
Division 26 of this Specification. Items of electrical control equipment specifically
mentioned to be furnished by the Division 23 either in these specifications or on the
electrical or mechanical drawings, shall be furnished and mounted by this Contractor and
shall be connected under and as required by this Division 23 and Division 26 of these
specifications.
B. Refer to the control equipment and wiring shown on the diagrams. Any changes or
additions required by specific equipment furnished shall be the complete responsibility of
the contractor.
C. Division must be fully coordinated with Division 26 to insure that all required
components of the work are included and fully understood. No additional cost shall
accrue to the Owner as a result of lack of coordination.
D. Where the detailed electrical work is not shown on the electrical drawings, the
Mechanical Contractor shall furnish, install and wire or have prewired all specified and
necessary controls for air handling equipment specified for this project. The objective of
this paragraph is to make sure a complete operating system is obtained at no additional
cost to the Owner for field wiring required related to the equipment.
2.12 FLUSHING AND DRAINING OF SYSTEMS/CLEANING OF PIPING AND DUCTS: Fill,
clean and flush and sterilize where appropriate, all water piping systems with water and drain
these systems before they are placed in operation. Flushings shall consist of not less than six (6)
short, intermittent flushes of five (5) to ten (10) minutes duration. Sample and test each flush for
cleanliness. Blow out all other piping systems with compressed air or nitrogen to remove foreign
materials that may have been left or deposited in the piping system during its erection. Duct
systems shall have all debris removed and fans shall be run to blow out all dust and foreign matter
before grilles, outlets or mixing boxes are installed and connected.
Damp wipe all ductwork on installation, cap open ducts, cover fan inlets, vacuum fan plenums
and related installation before starting fans. Run fans only with filters in place.
2.13 JOBSITE CLEANUP:
A. Keep site clean during progress of work.
B. At the conclusion of work, clean all installation thoroughly.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0000 - 11
1. Leave equipment in a factory dock condition. Correct any damage and touch up
or repaint if necessary.
2. Remove all debris from site.
ARCHITECTURAL ACCESS DOORS:
C. Extent of Work: Provide architectural grade access doors at each point of required access
to duct features, piping valves, and specialties, concealed equipment, etc. Coordinate this
work with other sections for ceilings, walls, etc.
D. Material: Steel framed doors with heavy duty hinges and latch type locking mechanisms
with surface finish configuration to accept, match or correlate with adjacent surface.
1. Product equivalent to Inland-Ryerson “Milcor”, Cesco
2. Size adequate to access point of maintenance, to work on and remove concealed
devices and equipment.
E. Installation: Complete, blended into adjacent work.
END OF SECTION 23 0000
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0000 - 1
SECTION 23 0100 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Furnish two sets of bound and four discs of the operation and maintenance manuals.
Manuals shall contain descriptive drawings and data which identify equipment installed
at the project and detail the procedures and parts required to maintain and repair the
equipment. Copies of approved submittals shall be included for all equipment.
1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS:
A. General:
1. The "Operating and Maintenance Manual" is a bound compilation of drawings
and data that the owner requires for each building or project. These manuals and
discs, complete with drawings and data, shall be furnished to BYU Idaho
Physical Plant.
2. The mechanical contractor has overall responsibility to obtain the necessary data
and compile the data as set forth in this specification, including items or
equipment purchased by the University and delivered to the contractor for
installation.
3. The number of binders (or "volumes") required will depend on the amount of
information to be catalogued. Total "sets" see paragraph 1.2A.
4. Make all information legible and sufficiently marked to indicate the exact size,
model, type, etc., of equipment furnished and installed.
B. Purpose: The Operating and Maintenance Manual is prepared to provide a ready
reference to all important pieces of mechanical and electrical equipment installed on the
project. It is also to provide the necessary operating and maintenance data for use by
service personnel. It is also to provide information required for checking equipment
performance or for planning of plant expansion or redesign.
PART 2 - MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.1 PAGE SIZE: All pages shall be standard 8-1/2 x 11 inches size or approximate multiples
(preferably 16 x 11 inches) folded to 8-1/2 x 11 inch.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0000 - 2
2.2 DRAWINGS: All drawings larger than 8-1/2" x 11" shall be folded and inserted in individual 8-
1/2" x 11" manilla pockets, which shall have standard three-ring side punching for insertion in the
binders. The equipment name, drawing description and number shall be written on the face of
each manilla pocket.
2.3 BINDERS: Binders shall be 8-1/2 x 11 inch, 3 ring ridged type “D” with clear plastic cover and
backbone for slip in title information 2" to 3" rings as required for the project. The number of
binders, however, shall be based on not filling them beyond 2-1/2" thickness.
A. Place the following information on 8-1/2” x 11” white paper to slip into plastic covers on
front and backbone:
1. "Operation and Maintenance Manual".
2. Project Name (and volume number if more than one volume).
3. Project Number (Seven Digit University project number).
4. Building name and number.
5. “BYU Idaho”.
6. Architect's name.
7. Engineer's name.
8. General Contractor's name.
9. Mechanical Contractor's name.
10. Items 6 through 8 need not be printed on the backbone.
2.4 CONTENTS AND INDEXING:
A. Manuals shall contain descriptions of the building systems in sufficient detail to
adequately indicate the type of systems installed and the basic details of their operation.
B. All purchased equipment data shall be used to designate the sections. Within each
section additional indexing of component parts may be required.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall contain to the fullest extent all possible
information pertinent to the equipment. The arrangement and type of information to be
filed shall be as follows:
1. Copy of purchase order change (if any).
2. Outline drawings, special construction details, “as built” electrical wiring and
control diagrams for all major and supplementary systems.
3. Manufacturer’s test or calculated performance data and certified test curves.
4. Installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, including a complete parts
list and sectional drawing with parts identification numbers. Mark with model,
size and plan number.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0000 - 3
5. Manufacturer’s brochure marked to indicate exact equipment purchased.
Brochures on component parts supplied by a manufacturer with his equipment,
but not manufactured directly by him, shall also be included.
6. The serial numbers of each item of equipment installed are to be listed with the
model numbers and plan symbols.
7. Include a Table of Contents. The contents shall be divided with tabbed index
dividers into the following suggested parts:
a. Part I Building and System Descriptions
b. Part II Purchased Equipment Data
c. Part III Test Reports and Valve Charts
d. Part IV Start-Up and Operation
e. Part V Preventative Maintenance Recommendations
8. A copy of the approved submittals for each piece of equipment.
9. A copy of all testing, adjusting and balancing reports.
10. Wiring diagrams, marked with model and size and plan symbol.
11. The index shall contain the name and address of the manufacturer and, if
different, where replacement and repair parts may be obtained.
END OF SECTION 23 0100
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 1
SECTION 23 0505 - MECHANICAL FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and General Conditions Specification Sections, apply to
this section.
1.2 SUMMARY: This section includes firestopping for the following:
A. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated floor construction including openings
containing wires/cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items.
B. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated walls and partitions including openings
containing wires/cables, pipes, ducts, control conduits, and other penetrating items.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread
of fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases.
B. F-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop
systems with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that
equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the constructions penetrated.
C. T-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop
systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where
indicated and where systems protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent
materials in occupiable floor areas. T-rated assemblies are required where the following
conditions exist:
1. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities.
2. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft
enclosures.
3. Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4-inch diameter
nominal pipe or 16 square inch in overall cross-sectional area.
D. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated,
as determined per ASTM E 119, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-
resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs.
E. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide
products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide
moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches or more in width
and exposed to possible loading and traffic.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and General
Conditions Specification Sections.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 2
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
1. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with
local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and are
nontoxic to building occupants.P
C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
D. Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and
inspecting agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on
comprehensive testing of current products.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following
requirements and those specified under the “System Performance Requirements” article:
1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A
qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency
performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems that is
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E
814 under conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01
inch of water is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials
surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems
complying with the following requirements.
a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by
reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by UL
in their “Fire Resistance Directory,” by Warnock Hersey, or by another
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
B. Information on drawings referring to specific design designations of through-penetration
firestop systems is intended to establish requirements for performance based on
conditions that are expected to exist during installation. Any changes in conditions and
designated systems require the Architect’s prior approval. Submit documentation
showing that the performance of proposed substitutions equals or exceeds that of the
systems they would replace and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience installer who has completed firestopping
that is similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for the project and that has
performed successfully.
D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems for each kind
of penetration and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer.
E. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the
method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, “Polarized
Light Microscopy.”
F. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure
that designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified
requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver firestopping products to project site in original, unopened containers or packages
with intact and legible manufacturers’ labels identifying product and manufacturer; date
of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 3
agency’s classification marking applicable to project; curing time; and mixing
instructions for multi-component materials.
B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to
moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when
substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturer’s instructions by natural
means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation.
1.8 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL:
A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with
each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the
firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install
fill materials and to comply with “System Performance Requirements” article in Part 1.
Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the
qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.
Accessories include but are not limited to the following items:
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following:
a. Semi-refractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation.
b. Ceramic fiber.
c. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to
prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
d. Fire-rated formboard.
e. Joint fillers for joint sealants.
2. Temporary forming materials.
3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
C. Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this
section that comply with system performance and other requirements.
1.9 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS:
A. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex formulation.
B. Intumescent Putty: Non-hardening, dielectric, water-resistant putty containing no
solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
C. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on
one side.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 4
D. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealant: Solvent-release-curing, single-component,
synthetic-polymer-based sealant.
E. Intumescent Metal-Faced Sheets: Single-component, intumescent sheet with 28-gauge
steel bonded to one side.
F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Intumescent Latex Sealant:
a. Fire Barrier CP 25WB Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products.
2. Intumescent Putty:
a. Fire Barrier Moldable Putty, 3M Fire Protection Products.
3. Intumescent Wrap Strips:
a. Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip, 3M Fire Protection Products.
4. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealants:
a. Fire Barrier CP 25N/S Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products.
b. Fire Barrier CP 25S/L Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products.
5. Intumescent Metal-Faced Sheets:
a. 3M Fire Barrier Composite Sheet CS195, 3M Fire Protection Products.
1.10 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other
conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.11 PREPARATION:
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing
firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the
following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and
from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping.
2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound
surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose
particles remaining from cleaning operation.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that
manufacturer’s recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond;
do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
1.12 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS:
A. General: Comply with the “System Performance Requirements” article in Part 1 and the
through-penetration firestop manufacturer’s installation instructions and drawings
pertaining to products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-
sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-
penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 5
materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop
systems.
C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to
produce the following results:
1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials,
accessories, and penetrating items.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
1.13 CLEANING:
A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work
progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of
firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur.
B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that
they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping
complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 23 0505
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL 23 0513 - 1
REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 23 0513 - MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL
WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Related Sections: Separate electrical components and materials required for field
installation and electrical connections are specified in Division 26.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This section specifies the basic requirements for motors and drives furnished by this
Division and for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged mechanical
equipment. Package components include, but are not limited to factory installed motors,
starters, and disconnect switches, etc.
B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for
mechanical equipment are noted within these documents.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Provide electrical components and materials which are UL labeled.
B. Provide variable speed drives which conform to the latest standard of the following:
1. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
2. NEC - National Electrical Code.
3. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
4. Provide complete packaged unit(s) which are listed and carry the label of at least
one of the following:
a. UL - Underwriters Laboratory
b. ETL - ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc.
c. CSA - Canadian Standards Association
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit complete product and application information for variable speed drives as
follows:
1. Provide multiple sets of drawings of system (VFD) being supplied, in strict
compliance with the specifications. Include, as a minimum:
a. General arrangement of each unit showing size and incoming and
outgoing conduit locations.
b. Schematic diagrams and drawings.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL 23 0513 - 2
REQUIREMENTS
c. Connection diagram, sufficient to install drive system.
2. Provide each unit with four owner/maintenance manuals which shall include:
a. Vendor information of equipment being supplied.
b. Connection information.
c. Startup procedure.
d. Fault reset instruction.
e. Wiring diagrams (power and control).
f. Parts list.
g. Test results.
h. Harmonic voltage distortion on line with unit off.
i. Harmonic voltage distortion with unit on line.
B. Submit product data for motors, belts, drives, starters, and other electrical components
with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as required by the
individual equipment specification sections. Verify project electrical characteristics with
submittal. Confirm suitability for altitude, maintaining full nameplate rating plus service
factor. Include this data in maintenance manual in accordance with Section "Operation
and Maintenance Manuals".
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators.
B. NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
C. NEMA Standards 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
D. NEMA Standards KS 1: Enclosed Switches.
E. IEEE Standard 519: Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in
Electrical Power Systems.
F. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. General: For variable frequency drives. Furnish a written warranty consisting of the
following:
1. Warranty parts and labor for five years after substantial completion.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL 23 0513 - 3
REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTORS:
A. Motor scheduled for connection to variable frequency drives shall be invertor duty rated.
B. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors,
more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment
specifications.
1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven
loads.
2. Motor sizes large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to
operate in the service factor range.
3. Two-speed motors with 2 separate windings for poly-phase motors. Confirm 2-
speed starter requirements with Division 26.
4. Single speed motors of the permanent split capacitor type. (PSC)
5. Temperature Rating: Minimum rate for 40
oC environment with maximum 90oC
temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class H Insulation for altitude,
Class B leads allowed).
6. Starting Capability: Frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control
system, and not less than 5 evenly timed spaced starts per hour for manually
controlled motors.
7. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors, 1.0
for TEFC motors.
8. Pump motors with an end shield with ventilation openings beneath the motor.
9. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general Purpose, continuous duty,
design "B", except "C" where required for high starting torque.
10. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; T-frame, use driven equipment
manufacturer's standards to suit specific application.
11. Bearings:
a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals;
b. Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally
inaccessible for regular maintenance;
c. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives
produce lateral or axial thrust in motor;
d. For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are
permitted.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL 23 0513 - 4
REQUIREMENTS
e. Motors for use with Variable Frequency Drives shall have insulated
bearings or grounded shafts.
12. Enclosure Type:
a. Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or
remotely located during operation;
b. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or
building occupants;
c. Weather protected type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed;
13. Overload Protection: built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated,
internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter.
14. Noise Rating: "Quiet"
15. Efficiency: "Premium Energy Efficient" motors shall have a minimum efficiency
as scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. If efficiency
not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard
industry motors", in accordance with IEEE Standard 112. Motors used with
Variable Frequency Drives shall be compatible and designed for use with
Variable Frequency Drives. Any “explosion proof” motor for classified areas,
scheduled for use with VFD’s, shall be listed for invertor duty applications.
16. Nameplate: indicate the full identification of manufacturer. ratings,
characteristics, construction, special features and similar information.
17. Acceptable Manufacturers: Baldor (Preferred), Century, General Electric,
Lincoln, Marathon, U.S. Motors.
2.2 MOTOR DRIVES:
A. Provide fan/motor drives with cast steel sheaves and V-belt sets of fabric and rubber
construction by Browning, Dodge, Woods. Match multiple belts and adjust to drive the
apparatus properly and to prevent slippage and undue wear in starting. Design drives for
150 percent or more of the specified motor nameplate rating. Bush all drives. Belts shall
be A, B or C section belts. Narrow gauge belts are not acceptable. Adjust drives or
replace sheaves as needed to obtain required capacities.
B. Provide flexible coupled drives for pumps by Browning, Dodge or Woods.
C. Provide a galvanized iron metal guard for each V-belt drive, coupled drive or rotating
shaft constructed around an angle iron frame, securely bolted to the floor or apparatus.
Design the guard to completely enclose drives and pulleys and be constructed to comply
with all safety requirements. Provide hinged access doors not less than 6" x 6" for access
to motor and fan shaft for test purposes. For double inlet fans, construct the belt guard
cover of 1/2" mesh expanded metal, arranged as not to restrict the air flow into the fan
inlet.
2.3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES:
A. General: Furnish and install Variable Frequency Drives (motor speed controllers) with
associated control signal components, harmonic filtering, power factor compensation and
related cabinets, devices, ventilation, etc. Sizes and capacity as schedule on the
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL 23 0513 - 5
REQUIREMENTS
drawings. Rate drives for constant torque application with variable torque application
capability. Drive shall be warrantied for parts and labor for 18 months after substantial
completion. Drives shall be wired for full VFD rating.
1. Verify compatibility of each VFD System being supplied with the related
equipment motor. If a new motor is being supplied supply the VFD to match the
new motor(s) and warranty the Drive to be compatible with that motor.
2. Furnish each system in a NEMA 1 enclosure either wall-mounted or free
standing, with fan forced, filtered ventilation.
3. Furnish each system with silk screened or engraved labels on all door operator
and pilot devices, attached with screws, rivets or adhesive.
4. Provide an electrical shock warning label on each system to warn personnel that
a potential of electric shock exists.
5. Supply each system complete, wired with all components assembled in a single
enclosure including, but not limited to the VFD units, contactors, door
interlocked circuit breaker. Units requiring mounting and inter-wiring of
separate bypass enclosure are not under this specification.
6. Supply a complete set of engineering drawings consisting of, as a minimum,
general arrangement, power wiring diagram, control wiring diagram and
schematic of VFD System components, options, and equipment and tests
included to meet power quality requirements of the specification.
7. Furnish an owner's manual consisting of catalog sheets showing actual
components and parts numbers. Manual shall also show test certificates,
warranty and service personnel responsible for warranty.
8. Furnish factory trained VFD System installation and start-up and warranty
service. Mount unit and connect to power supply, mount and wire remote
devices.
B. Construction: Assemble the Variable Frequency Drive units and components in a NEMA
1 enclosure.
1. Each Variable Frequency Drive inverter shall be altitude compensated and sized
for the elevation at which the unit will be installed. The inverter shall operate in
an ambient temperature of -10°C to 50°C and a humidity of 0 to 90 percent non-
condensing.
2. Mount each Variable Frequency Drive inverter unit on a removable panel along
with all other components such that, if required, the panel can be removed from
the enclosure for maintenance or part replacement.
3. Mount the door with a minimum of two hinges with removable pins. Door shall
be rigid and large doors shall have additional hinges and stiffening steel.
4. Paint enclosure, two coats over primer, with high grade enamel, a minimum of
50-70 microns thick.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL 23 0513 - 6
REQUIREMENTS
5. The enclosure shall be force ventilated and the exhaust ports covered with
louvers. All components of the system, except sensors, shall be contained in this
single enclosure as an integrated package.
6. Door mounted operator devices shall be industrial, oil tight, equivalent to control
center devices.
7. Control power for operator devices and customer connections shall be 120 volts.
The control power transformer shall be a "Machine Tool" type and have both
primary and secondary fusing.
C. Standard Features: Provide the following features as standard on all VFD units
furnished.
1. Each VFD unit shall be a solid state AC to DC converter sinusoidal pulse-width
modulation (PWM) type, with an altitude adjusted horsepower rating equal to or
greater than the motor HP that the unit is supplying or not less than the scheduled
rating, whichever is greater.
2. Electrical characteristics:
a. Input Voltage 460 VAC +/- 10% (Nominal 480 Volts)
b. Input Frequency 60 Hz +/- 5%
3. Motor braking torque available by means of regenerative braking.
4. An output frequency clamp such that minimum or maximum output frequency
can be set at desired limits.
5. Rated overload current shall be 150% for one minute.
6. Each VFD shall have an adjustable acceleration/deceleration time setting from
one second to 120 seconds.
7. Each VFD shall maintain a 95 percent or better displacement power factor over
the entire speed range.
8. Each VFD shall maintain a 95 percent or better output/input efficiency over the
entire speed range.
9. Each VFD shall be supported with a door interlocked input disconnect motor
circuit protector. The MCP shall allow trip adjustment sufficient to start the
motor across the line in the bypass mode and normally be set at a minimum
setting for maximum protection in the VFD mode. The door mounted handle
shall be lockable in the off position.
10. Each VFD shall be supported with the following door mounted operator controls
as a minimum:
a. Hand/Off/Auto Switch - keyed switch required.
b. Local/Remote Switch - keyed switch required.
c. Frequency Setting - through programmable controller pad.
d. Frequency Indication Meter Calibrated in % Speed - through
programmable controller pad.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL 23 0513 - 7
REQUIREMENTS
e. Power on Light
f. VFD Enable Light
g. VFD Fault Light
h. External Fault Light (safeties interlock)
11. Each VFD shall be supplied with a minimum of the following protective features
with an alarm display indication:
a. Overcurrent Shut-off
b. Regenerative Overvoltage
c. Electronic Thermal Protector
d. Heat Sink Overheat
e. Instantaneous Power Failure
f. Ground Fault
12. The following termination points on terminal strip for field connections:
a. Safeties Interlock
b. Remote Start/Stop Contact
c. Remote VFD Fault Contacts (N.C.)
d. Remote VFD/Bypass Enable Contacts (N.O.)
e. Remote Electronic Signal Input
13. Auto restart initiation by means of an automatic time delayed restart after
recovering from under voltage or loss of power. The inverter shall have auto
restart compatibility with power provided by standby engine generator system
provide all required components to insure compatibility to operate on standby
engine power. The invertor shall not automatically restart after overcurrent,
overvoltage, over temperature, or any other damaging conditions but shall require
a manual restart.
14. Remote input signal connection terminals (0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC = 0-100%
speed or 4-20 mA = 20-100% Speed).
D. Additional Configuration Features:
1. Bypass Option: Equip the inverter with a manual bypass contactor arrangement
for transfer to the feeder line to operate at constant speed. The contactors shall
be electrically and mechanically interlocked and supplied with an adjustable
motor overload.
2. Provide a VFD isolation switch to allow maintenance on the VFD while in the
bypass mode. Furnish prewired in the same enclosure, including contactors,
VFD isolation switch, motor overload VFD/Bypass selector switch and Bypass
ON light.
3. Digital or Analog Ammeter, through programmable key pad.
4. Digital or Analog Voltmeter, through programmable key pad.
5. Frequency Jump: Furnish a frequency jump control to avoid operating at a point
of resonance with the natural frequency of the machine.
6. Provide series line reactors for harmonic distortion control as standard
equipment.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL 23 0513 - 8
REQUIREMENTS
7. Drive Speed Control, I/E or I/I or E/E or E/I transducers as needed.
8. Synchronous transfer to allow transfer from VFD to utility line and back to VFD
unit while motor is running.
9. Computer interface option through the addition of a RS 232 data card.
10. Remote Digital/Analog Speed Meter with a 4-20 ma signal. Locate at central
control console.
11. Provide each VFD with the ability to be able to communicate with the building
automation system using BACNET MS/TP protocol.
12. 5% line reactor.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers of VFD equipment shall meet the
following requirements.
1. Suppliers of VFD Systems must be in the primary business of supplying Variable
Frequency Drives and have a minimum of five (5) years of service in that
business.
2. Vendor must have local service center with factory spare parts inventory and
factory authorized service technician on call 24 hours/day.
3. VFD units supplied in response to this specification shall be labeled by UL, CSA
or ETL. Note, the entire unit shall carry the label not just a component.
4. The following VFD suppliers are acceptable providing that all points of this
specification are adhered to:
a. ABB
b. Energy Management Corporation using Mitsubishi drives.
5. VFD vendors must have prior approval from Owner before quoting equipment
specified. If not listed above, vendor must apply to Owner for approval 10 days
prior to bid date showing point by point compliance with this specification
including sample of typical harmonic voltage distortion test report. In
compliance with general requirements of the specification.
F. Testing: Prior to shipping, test each unit and submit certified test report with each unit.
Standard tests to include:
1. Visual inspection, consisting of checking unit enclosure, wiring, connections,
fasteners, covers and locking mechanism.
2. High pot test; two (2)X rated voltage plus 1000 volts AC for 60 seconds shall be
applied per UL 508 on all perifial drive system power components (circuit
breakers, contactors, motor overloads, line reactors, disconnect switches, etc.) as
a complete package. A copy of test results shall be included in operation
manuals.
3. Motor run test.
4. Control panel devices, test all devices and lights.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL 23 0513 - 9
REQUIREMENTS
5. Optional equipment, test optional equipment specified with VFD system.
6. Special tests, as required and specified.
G. Installation: Field mounting pad and power connections shall be provided by contractor.
1. Vendor shall supply field start-up service by an authorized factory service
representative consisting of system check-out, start-up and system run. The
vendor shall provide warranty and authorized factory service including operator
training. A written certificate of same shall be provided at start-up. Provide
written certified start-up report. VFD service technicians shall be full time
employees of the vendor or manufacturer, primarily engaged in VFD service
work during normal business hours but on call 24 hours. Start-up by sales
representative is not acceptable.
2. Startup/adjustment effort shall have at least two segments.
a. Prior to Test and Balance work to place equipment in operation.
b. At conclusion of Test and Balance work to adjust units to actual
operating conditions.
3. The following adjustments and tests shall be performed as a minimum with
certified copies included in the maintenance and operation manual.
a. Verify that the input voltage is within the manufacturer's specification
tolerances.
b. Verify that the motor rotation is correct in all modes of operation.
c. Verify all operator devices, programming and monitoring functions to be
fully operational.
d. Verify operation of all field signal control connections.
e. Measure and record system output voltage and current at 50% and 100%
speed. Tune the output voltage to correspond to motor nameplate rating
at full speed. Check full load current measurements against nameplate
data.
f. Make all parameter adjustments to tune and optimize the VFD system to
the application. Record all configuration values as part of this report.
g. Conduct harmonic tests as identified in the specification. Measurements
shall be recorded for each unit with the VFD system off, running at 50%
speed, and running at full speed and load.
END OF SECTION 23 0513
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 23 0519 - 1
SECTION 23 0519 - THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. This section is Division 23 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges section, and is part of
each Division 23 section making reference to thermometers and pressure gauges
specified herein.
C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of meters and gauges required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or
specified in this and other Division-23 sections.
B. Meters and gauges specified in this section include the following:
1. Temperature Gauges and Fittings.
a. Digital Thermometers.
b. Thermometer Wells.
c. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs.
2. Pressure Gauges and Fittings.
a. Pressure Gauges.
b. Pressure Gauge Valves.
c. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of thermometers
and/or pressure gauges, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Temperature and Pressure Gauge Types: Provide temperature and pressure gauges of
same type by same manufacturer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation
instructions for each type of thermometer and pressure gauge.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of
valve, indicating dimensions, weights, materials, and methods of assembly of
components.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 23 0519 - 2
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of
thermometer and pressure gauge. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in
Maintenance Manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DIGITAL THERMOMETERS:
A. General: Provide digital thermometers, designed and constructed for use in service
indicated variable angle, light powered.
B. Case: High impact ABS.
C. Range: -40/300F.
D. Display: 3/8" LLD digits.
E. Accuracy: 1% of reading or 1F, whichever is greater.
F. Resolution: 1/10 between -19.9/199.9F.
G. Recalibration: Internal potentiometer.
H. Lux Rating: 10 lux.
I. Update: 10 seconds.
J. Ambient Operating: -30/110F.
K. Sensor: Glass passivated thermistor.
L. Stem Assembly: Industrial Glass.
M. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide glass thermometers of
one of the following:
1. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
2. Weksler
3. Trerice
2.2 THERMOMETER WELLS:
A. General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated
to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2" extension for insulated piping.
Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well.
B. Manufacturer: Same as thermometers.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 23 0519 - 3
2.3 TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTOR PLUGS:
A. General: Provide temperature gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200
degrees F (93 degrees C). Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate, equip with ½"
NPS fitting, with self-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for
inserting 1/8" O.D. probe assembly from dial type insertion thermometer. Equip orifice
with gasketed screw cap and chain. Provide extension, length equal to insulation
thickness, for insulated piping.
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide temperature gauge
connector plugs of one of the following:
1. Peterson Equipment Co.
2. SISCO
3. Universal
4. Flow Design
2.4 PRESSURE GAUGES: (Liquid Filled) (Non-Liquid Filled for Steam Applications)
A. General: Provide pressure gauges of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed
and constructed for use in service indicated. Liquid filled.
B. Type: Liquid filled for use with temperature up to 200F.
C. Case and Ring: 4" type 304 stainless steel case with polished stainless steel bayonet ring.
D. Dial: White aluminum with black markings.
E. Window: Clear acrylic.
F. Tube: Phosphor bronze.
G. Socket: Brass with restrictor.
H. Pointer: Black anodized aluminum, adjustable.
I. Movement: Stainless steel rotary type with bushings.
J. Accuracy: 1% of full scale.
K. Connection: 1/4" male NPT, Provide pressure snubber, for water service.
L. Range: Conform to the following; place operating pressure in mid-range.
1. Vacuum: 30" Hg - 15 psi - 30 psi, as needed.
2. Water: 0 - 100 psi - 160 psi, as needed.
3. Steam 0 - 25 psi – 160 psi as needed.
M. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pressure gauges of one
of the following:
1. U.S. Gauge
2. Marsh Instrument Co./Marshalltown
3. Trerice.
4. Weiss.
5. Weksler.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 23 0519 - 4
2.5 PRESSURE GAUGE VALVES:
A. General: Provide pressure gauge valves between pressure gauges and gauge tees on
piping systems. Construct gauge valve of brass bar stock with 1/4" female NPT on each
end, and knurled handle brass plug or use 1/4" ball valve or Crane 88 needle valve (for
steam).
B. Syphon: For steam, 1/4" straight coil constructed of brass tubing with 1/4" male NPT on
each end.
C. Manufacturer: Same as for pressure gauges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION: Examine areas and conditions under which meters and gauges are to be installed.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE GAUGES:
A. General: Install temperature gauges in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be
easily read by observer standing on floor.
B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:
1. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.
2. At outlet of each water heater at connection of new domestic hot water to
existing domestic hot water.
3. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air handling units, and built-up central
systems.
4. At inlet and outlet of each boiler.
C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position.
Fill well with oil or graphite, secure cap.
D. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on
pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES:
A. General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge bar stock valve located
on pipe at most readable position.
B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:
1. At suction and discharge of each pump, single gauge, mani-folded to include
inlet strainer.
2. Across of each pressure reducing valve.
3. At water service outlet at connection of domestic cold water.
4. At inlet and outlet of strainer.
C. Pressure Gauge Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber for water.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 23 0519 - 5
D. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at
most readable position. Secure cap.
END OF SECTION 23 0519
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) VALVES 23 0523 - 1
SECTION 23 0523 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. This section is Division 23 Valves section, and is part of each Division 23 section making
reference to valves specified herein.
C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of valves required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in
other Division 23 sections.
B. Types of valves specified in section include the following:
1. Drain Valves.
2. Ball Valves.
3. Plug Valves.
4. Butterfly Valves.
5. Check Valves.
6. Swing Check.
7. Miscellaneous Valves.
C. Valves furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of
equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of valves, of
types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 5 years.
B. Valve Types: Provide valves of same type by same manufacturer.
C. Valve Identification: Provide valves with manufacturer's name (or trademark) and
pressure rating clearly marked on valve body.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation
instructions for each type of valve. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and
size of valve. Submit valve schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size,
location, and valve features for each required valve.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type (exploded view) shop drawings
for each type of valve, indicating dimensions, weights, materials, and methods of
assembly of components.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) VALVES 23 0523 - 2
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of valve.
Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in Maintenance Manual; in accordance
with requirements of General Conditions.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. MSS Compliance: Mark valves in accordance with MSS-25 "Standard Marking
System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions".
2. ANSI Compliance: For face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of flanged- or
welded-end valve bodies, comply with ANSI B16.10 "Face-to-Face and
End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves".
3. UL and FM Compliance: Provide valves used in fire protection piping, which
are UL-listed and FM approved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVES:
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in
service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper
selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end
connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where
more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option.
B. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.
C. Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than
quarter-turn. Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves, 4" and smaller, other than plug
valves. Provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves. Provide gear operators for
quarter-turn valves 6" and larger. Provide chain-operated sheaves and chains for
overhead valves 8'-0" and higher above finished floor.
D. Connections: Unless otherwise noted for a particular reason, any valve 2" and larger
shall have flanges. For grooved joint steel pipe in 6" and larger sizes, convert to flanged
pipe, use indicated ball or butterfly valves.
2.2 GLYCOL HEATING WATER AND GLYCOL CHILLED WATER:
A. Ball Valves:
1. Steel piping, 2-1/2” and smaller: 400 psig WOG @ 250ºF, bronze construction,
threaded ends, bubble tight mineral filled PTFE seat at 250 psig under water,
hard, stainless steel ball and stem. Operate with flow in either direction. Lever
or tee handle as required. Suitable for throttling and tight shut-off. Crane,
Keystone, Powell, Nibco/Scott, Milwaukee, Grinnell. All valves of the same
type shall be of the same manufacturer. No other manufacturers approved. All
drain valves shall be furnished with capped 3/4” threaded hose outlet connection.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) VALVES 23 0523 - 3
2. Copper piping, 2-1/2” and smaller: 400 psig WOG @ 250ºF bronze construction,
threaded or solder ends, bubble tight mineral filled. PTFE seat at 250 psig under
water, hard stainless steel ball and stem. Operate with flow in either direction.
Lever or tee handle as required. Suitable for tight shut-off. Watts B-6000-SS or
B-6001-SS, Apollo 70-100 or 70-200, Milwaukee BA-100S or BA-150S,
Hammond, Belimo. No other manufacturer approved. All drain valves shall be
furnished with capped 3/4” threaded hose outlet connection.
B. Butterfly Valves:
1. For piping 3" and larger. Install with weld neck flanges, Norris Series R-3011-
23SS-2B, double tapped lug, single-flange ductile iron or cast iron body, 316 SS
disc, stainless steel shaft with extended neck for insulated pipe, EPDM seat and
O-rings, indicating worm gear operator, 175 psig bubble tight pressure rating
(250 where required). Demco, Keystone, Rockwell, Grinnell, Bray, ABZ,
Hammond or Milwaukee.
C. Swing Check Valves:
1. 2" and Smaller: Bronze, threaded, Y-pattern, 200# WOG at swing check valve.
Approved manufacturers: Crane, Hammond, Nibco.
2. 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body, flanged, 200# WOG swing check valve with
bronze trim. Approved manufacturers: Crane, Hammond, Nibco.
D. Balancing Cocks:
1. 2" and Smaller: 175 psig WOG, cast iron body, square head, screwed ends,
wrench operated, lubricated.
2. 2-1/2" and Larger: 200 psig WOG, cast iron body, square head, flanged ends,
wrench operated, lubricated.
E. Balancing Valves: Circuit balancing valve with venturi and pressure taps. Do not use
gate valves or butterfly valves as balancing valves. Provide schedule showing pressure
drop and flow rate of each valve. Flow Set Accusetter, Armstrong, Gerand, Griswold. If
improperly sized balance valves are found during the test and balance work, the
improperly sized balanced valves shall be replaced by the contractor at no additional cost
to the Owner or project.
2.3 DOMESTIC COLD WATER, DOMESTIC HOT WATER, AND DOMESTIC HOT WATER
RETURN (COPPER PIPE):
A. BALL VALVES:
1. Steel Pipe 2-1/2" and Smaller: 400 psig WOG @ 250
oF, bronze construction,
threaded ends, hard, stainless steel ball. Operate with flow in either direction.
Suitable for throttling and tight shut-off. Apollo 70-140 or 70-240. Milwaukee
BA-100S or BA-150S, Watts B-5000-SS or BA-6001-SS.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND SPECIALTIES:
A. AIR VENT VALVES: Stockham B-64, 300 psi working pressure, 3/8" bronze or Crane
No. 88, Watson McDonnel, Metraflex, Bell & Gossett.
B. WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES: For making up to heating systems, Watts
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) VALVES 23 0523 - 4
No. 223U, capacity as noted.
C. WATER PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES: For relief for heating system, Bell and Gossett
No. 480, Watts, pressure setting as required.
D. GAUGE VALVES: Crane #88 bronze needle valve or Trerice barstock needle valve, or
ball valve.
E. REDUCED PRESSURE PRINCIPLE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS: Complete with
isolation valve and strainer upstream and insulation valve downstream. Watts 009 Series.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION:
A. Locate all valves in locations which will allow easy operation and facilitate maintenance.
B. Install valves with stems horizontal or above.
C. Provide chain operators for any valves located more than 8 feet above finished floor.
This means double acting lever handles for quarter turn valves, or chain wheels for multi-
turn valves. Arrange valves and set up chain length for proper operation.
D. All branch lines which supply a specific area of the building (such as a toilet room) shall
be valved near the main so that each area may be isolated from the system for repairs
without having to shut down both men and women's restrooms, other areas, or the whole
building.
E. Make all valves located above a non-lay-in type ceiling or behind a wall accessible by
means of an access door.
F. Valve should be installed with bonnets at least 45 degrees above the horizontal to ensure
debris does not collect in bonnet.
END OF SECTION 23 0523
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529 - 1
SECTION 23 0529 - MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. This section is Division 23 Mechanical Supporting Devices section, and is part of each
Division 23 section making reference to supports and anchors specified herein.
C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of supports and anchors required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or
specified in other Division 23 sections.
B. Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following:
1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports.
2. Vertical-Piping Clamps.
3. Hanger-Rod Attachments.
4. Building Attachments and In-Beds.
5. Saddles and Shields.
6. Miscellaneous Materials.
7. Roof Equipment Supports.
8. Anchors.
9. Equipment Supports.
C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as
part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections.
D. Relate this section to Section 23 05 48 regarding seismic and vibration control.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and
anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation
instructions for each type of support and anchor.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and
anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of
assembly of components.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529 - 2
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and
anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in
accordance with requirements of General Conditions.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable building, mechanical and plumbing
codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors.
2. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are UL-listed and FM
approved.
3. MSS Standard Compliance:
a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and
manufacture comply with MSS SP-58.
b. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69.
c. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS
SP-89.
d. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HORIZONTAL-PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated horizontal piping
hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types
listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems, in accordance with MSS
SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one
manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit
pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield
for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping
systems.
B. Adjustable Steel Clevises Hangers: MSS Type 1. (For suspension of non-insulated or
insulated stationary pipe lines; 1/2" to 30".)
C. Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3. (For suspension of pipe requiring up to
4" of insulation and where flexibility of clamp is desirable; 3/4" to 24".)
D. Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4. (For suspension of cold pipe lines or hot lines where
little or no insulation is required; 1/2" to 24".)
E. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 5. (For suspension of piping when off-center closure allowing
installation of hanger before erection of piping is desired; 1/2" to 4".)
F. Adjustable Swivel Pipe Rings: MSS Type 6. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary
pipe lines; 3/4" to 8".)
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529 - 3
G. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7. (For suspension of non-insulated
stationary pipe lines; 3/4" to 8".)
H. Adjustable Band Hangers: MSS Type 9. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary
pipe liens; 1/2" to 8".)
I. Adjustable Swivel Rings, Band Type: MSS Type 10. (For suspension of non-insulated
stationary pipe lines; 3/8" to 8".)
J. Split Pipe Rings: MSS Type 11. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines;
3/8" to 3".)
K. Extension Split Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 12. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary
pipe lines; 3/8" to 3".)
L. U-Bolts: MSS Type 24. (For support of heavy loads; 1/2" to 30".)
M. Clips: MSS Type 26. (For support of uninsulated piping not subject to expansion or
contraction.)
N. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36, including steel pipe base- support and cast-iron
floor flange. (To support pipe from floor stanchion, using floor flange to secure
stanchion to floor 4" to 36".)
O. Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and cast-iron
floor flange. (To Type 36 except U-bolt provided for retaining pipe.)
2.2 VERTICAL-PIPING CLAMPS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated vertical-piping
clamps complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by
Installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to
exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide copper-plated clamps for copper-piping
systems.
B. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. (For support and steadying of pipe risers; 3/4" to
20". Also supports pipe covering or insulation.)
C. Four-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42. (When longer ends are required for riser
clamps.)
2.3 HANGER-ROD ATTACHMENTS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated hanger-rod
attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed,
selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in
accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only
one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod
attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for
copper-piping systems.
B. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. (For adjustment up to 6" for heavy loads.)
C. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14. (For use on high temperature piping installations.)
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529 - 4
D. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. (For use with split pipe rings, MSS type 11.)
E. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. (For attaching hanger rod to various types of
building attachments.)
2.4 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS AND IN-BEDS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated building attachments
complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by
Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit
hanger rods. Provide copper-plated building attachments for copper-piping systems.
B. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18. (For upper attachment for suspending pipe hangers from
concrete ceiling.)
C. Top Beam C-Clamp: MSS Type 19. (Use under roof installations with bar joist
construction, for attachment to top flange of structural shape.)
D. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. (For attachment to bottom flange of
beams, channels, or angles.)
E. Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21. (For attachment to center of bottom flange of
beams.)
F. Welded Beam Attachments: MSS Type 22. (For attachment to bottom of beams where
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.)
G. C-Clamps: MS Type 23. (For attachment to structural shapes.)
H. Top Beam Clamps: MSS Type 25. (For attachment to top of beams when hanger rod is
required tangent to edge of flange.)
I. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. (For attachment to bottom of steel I-beams.)
J. Steel Beam Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 28. (Same as Type 28 with link
extensions.)
K. Linked Steel Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 29. (Same as Type 28 with link
extensions.)
L. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. (For attachment to structural steel.)
M. Steel Brackets: One of the following for indicated loading:
1. Light Duty: MSS Type 31, to 570 pounds.
2. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32, to 1,500 pounds.
3. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33, to 3,000 pounds.
N. Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34. (For use on sides of steel or wooden beams.)
O. Plate Lugs: MSS Type 57. (For attachment to steel beams where flexibility at the beam
is desired.)
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529 - 5
P. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58. (For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movements where head room is limited.
Q. Refer to drawings for Unistrut inserts.
2.5 SADDLES AND SHIELDS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers and
supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to
mate with pipe insulation.
B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; see section Mechanical Insulation for void fill
requirements. Use for roller supports and on all pipes 10" and larger.
C. Protection Shields: See section Mechanical Insulation.
D. Thermal Hanger Shields: See section Mechanical Insulation.
E. Manufacturer; Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thermal hanger shields of
one of the following:
1. Elcen Metal Products Co.
2. Pipe Shields, Inc.
2.6 MANUFACTURERS OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one
of the following:
1. Kin-Line, Inc.
2. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co.; Div. Figgie International
3. ITT Grinnel Corp.
4. B-Line
5. Unistrut
2.7 HIGH HUMIDITY AREAS: Use cadmium plated or galvanized hangers, attachments, rods, nuts,
bolts and other accessories in boiler rooms or other high humidity areas.
2.8 OUTSIDE AREAS: Use galvanized hangers, attachments, rods, nuts, bolts and other accessories for
all outside areas.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A 36.
C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly
graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0
parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration.
Use Embeco grout for non-shrink applications.
D. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from factory built channel (Unistrut) system and use
factory fasteners for channel steel shapes, selected for loads required; weld steel in
accordance with AWS standards.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529 - 6
E. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi- steel or heavy fabricated steel,
consisting of bolted two- section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider
bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder.
Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable
to Installer.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building
structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct
inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other
building structural attachments.
B. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet at
project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and
testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination with
work of this section and Architect/Engineer for purpose of reviewing material selections and
procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with requirements specified.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS:
A. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for
proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in
MSS SP-69. Install additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers,
expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete
is placed; fasten insert securely to forms.
1. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install
reinforcing bars through the openings at the tops of inserts.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to rigidly support piping properly
from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install
supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes
is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to
support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other
accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and
supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.
C. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper
plated, or by isolating with foam rubber covering or 30 mil insulating tape.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529 - 7
D. Provisions for Movement:
1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.
2. Install supports within 2 feet of non-vertical flex connectors.
E. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe
deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded.
G. Insulated Piping: Do not allow hangers to come in contact with pipe where pipe is specified to be
insulated.
H. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through
insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31.
I. Shields: Where low-compressive-strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold or chilled
water piping, install galvanized steel protective shields. Install calcium silicate blocks (12" long
minimum) at support points.
J. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS:
A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31,
and to prevent transfer for loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure.
Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards.
C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit
manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to maximums
recommended by manufacturer for each unit.
D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe-runs, at
intermediate points in pipe-runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of
anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.
3.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS:
A. Provide concrete housekeeping bases for all floor mounted equipment furnished as part of the work of
Division 15. Size bases to extend a minimum of 4" beyond equipment base in any direction; and 4"
above finished floor elevation. Construct of reinforced concrete, roughen floor slab beneath base for
bond, and provide steel rod anchors between floor and base. Locate anchor bolts using equipment
manufacturer's templates. Chamfer top and edge corners.
B. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from structure.
Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Provide factory-fabricated tank
saddles for tanks mounted on steel stands.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529 - 8
C. Furnish roof equipment supports to Contractor for installation as part of work of Division 7; not work
of this section.
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments.
B. Support Adjustment: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment to proper
level and elevations.
C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION 23 0529
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548 - 1
SECTION 23 0548 - MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL:
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. This section is Division 23 Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control section, and is part
of each Division 23 section making reference to mechanical sound, vibration and seismic control
specified herein.
C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY: Furnish and install complete seismic restraint and vibration control systems for all work
installed under Division 23. Including owner furnished contractor installed equipment. Work to be
responsive to the intent of the International Building Code, latest adopted edition, for the respective
seismic design Category B, importance factor of 1.5.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Engage the services of an independent seismic and vibration
control subcontractor who has the technology, experience, computer capabilities and
manufactured products to prepare the required computations, shop drawings and special devices
to meet the minimum requirements described herein. Select from the following:
1. Amber Booth
2. Kinetics
3. Mason - West
4. Vibro-Acoustics
B. The seismic and vibration control subcontractor shall visit the site during construction at a
minimum of two specific periods.
1. When equipment is set in place, prior to placement of seismic restraint devices for the
purposes of directing the contractor in properly locating and installing the approved
devices.
2. At the completion of the project, prior to final mechanical inspection, for the purpose of
verifying the correctness of the seismic restraint and vibration isolation device
installation and preparing certification of the seismic vibration-isolation work.
C. The seismic subcontractor shall exercise the quality control for this work and shall include, but
not be limited to instructions direct to the Mechanical (Division 23) Contractor concerning:
1. Anchoring of all mechanical equipment including owner furnished and contractor
installed.
2. Vibration mounting of equipment.
3. Equipment base coordination with restraint requirements.
4. Snubbing of equipment.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548 - 2
5. Bracing and anchoring of ductwork piping and conduit.
6. Provision for expansion and vibration of piping.
7. Concrete and/or steel pads or bases to assure proper mounting of restraints and isolators.
8. Vibration isolation of exhaust fans, relief fans, ventilation fans, and supply air fans.
D. The subcontractor shall be responsible for identifying the need for the size and location of steel
sole plates and their attachment to structural steel or concrete.
E. The subcontractor shall certify in writing that he has inspected the installation and that all
isolation, anchors and seismic restraint materials are installed correctly and functioning properly.
Certification shall be provided after all corrective work has been completed.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submittal data is required and shall consist of computations, vibration isolation selection,
equipment anchors, anchor bolt sizes, supports, seismic restraints, sole plate data, restraint
locations and type of restraints.
B. Submittal data shall identify dimensions, load deflection data, center of gravity, standard
connections, manufacturer's recommendations, behavior problems including vibrations, thermal
expansion, building expansion joints, etc., associated with equipment, ductwork, piping and
conduit.
C. Calculations need not be submitted when restraint devices for piping, conduit and ductwork are
proposed in accordance with the SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints.
D. Selection of isolator anchors and restraints shall be clearly made known along with the basis for
selection so that proposed systems can be reviewed.
E. Calculations furnished for anchors, anchor bolts, sole plates and other support steel for restraining
devices shall be signed and stamped by an engineer licensed in one of the United States.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards: (Latest adopted edition)
1. International Building Code
2. NFPA bulletin 90A,
3. UL Standard 181
4. Guidelines for seismic restraint of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems.
Published by the Sheet Metal Industry Fund of Los Angeles, California, and the
Plumbing and Piping Industry Council, Inc., Los Angeles, California.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - PRODUCTS: Restraint devices shall be especially designed to resist seismic forces in all
directions.
A. Snubbers: Restraint surfaces which engage under seismic motion shall be cushioned with a
resilient elastomer neoprene (bridge bearing neoprene) to protect equipment. Restraints shall
allow a maximum of 1/4" before engaging and shall not interfere in normal starting or stopping
operation. Housing shall allow for visual inspection to determine clearances during system
operation. Restraints shall be field adjustable and be positioned for up to 1/4" clearance both
horizontally and vertically. Mountings and snubbers are to be manufactured under a Quality
Assurance (QA) Program.
B. Snubbers and Isolator Combination Devices: Combination unitized devices may be used where
equipment isolation is required. They shall include the requirements listed for snubbers.
Isolation portion shall be stable spring type with combination leveling bolt and equipment
fastening device. Base plate shall have adequate means for bolting to structure. The spring
assembly shall be removable and shall fit within a welded steel enclosure.
C. Piping, Conduit and Duct Restraints: Restraint materials for exposed installation shall be
standard fabricated flat steel, angle rod and channel members.
1. Restraint members shall be bolt connected. Cabling materials and methods shall be used
only in chases or concealed ceiling spaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEISMIC RESTRAINT GUIDELINE:
A. Guidelines for SMACNA seismic restraints for conduit, piping and ductwork are to serve as the
basis for restraint methods. (Exception - no cabling shall be used in the restraint systems except
as noted.)
3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT-PIPING AND CONDUIT:
A. General: All piping and conduit shall be protected in all planes by restraints, designed to
accommodate thermal movement while at the same time restraining seismic motion. Tanks and
vessels connected to piping shall be restrained in the same manner as the piping.
B. Locations of the restraints shall include, but not be limited to:
1. At all drops or risers to equipment connections.
2. At all changes in direction of piping and conduit.
3. At all horizontal runs of pipe and conduit to keep it in alignment and prevent sagging
with restraints not to exceed the following:
a. Transverse bracing at 40'-0" O.C. maximum.
b. Longitudinal bracing at 80'-0" O.C. maximum.
4. Provide flexibility in joints where pipes pass through building seismic or expansion
joints.
5. On both sides of flexible connectors.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548 - 4
C. Exceptions:
1. Conduit under 2-1/2" size and piping under 1-1/2" size need not be additionally
seismically restrained except as follows:
a. Brace all piping and conduit 1-1/4" and larger in boiler rooms, mechanical
rooms, electrical equipment rooms and refrigeration machinery rooms.
b. Brace all fuel gas and oil piping, medical gas piping and compressed air
piping 1" and larger.
2. Seismic bracing may be omitted:
a. When the top of the pipe is suspended 12" or less from the supporting
structure member and the pipe or conduit is suspended by an individual
hanger.
b. On all piping 3/4" and smaller.
3.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINT INSULATED PIPING: Where piping is designated to be insulated, the
points of support shall be protected by a 360o sheet metal shield. Insert insulation shall be of the
same thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. (Pipe Shields, Inc.)
The sheet metal shield wrapped around the insert shall be of the following lengths and gauge
thickness.
PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE
1/2 - 1-1/2" 4" 20
2 - 6" 6" 20
8 - 10" 9" 16
12 - 18" 12" 16
20 and up 18" 16
3.4 SEISMIC RESTRAINT - PIPING AT FIRE-WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATION WHERE
WALL IS USED AS A RESTRAINT:
A. Bare Pipe: Encase pipe in minimum 24 gauge sheet metal can sized for one inch spacing
between pipe and outer diameter of can. Spacing shall be packed in accordance with fire
resistant/retardant materials in accordance with Section: FIRE STOPPING.
B. Insulated Pipe: Encase in adjustable or fixed length cans, minimum 24 gauge, sized for
maximum one inch spacing between insulation and outer diameter of can. Insulation shall
consist of 360o insert sized to extend a minimum of 1" beyond wall or floor penetration and
of the same thickness as the adjoining insulation. Spacing between shield and can shall be
packed in accordance with Section: FIRE STOPPING.
3.5 SEISMIC RESTRAINT GROOVED PIPING:
A. Where grooved piping is selected as the piping system, it must be seismically restrained as
well as provide for thermal movement.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548 - 5
B. Pipes may not be fastened to differently moving structures such as a wall or a ceiling, or a
ceiling and a floor. The intent is to have the piping system move with the structure and not
separate from it.
C. In general, grooved piping shall be provided with additional flexible couplings to allow
extreme deflections to occur, yet restrained to prevent movement beyond the limits of the
flexible connections. Linear movement shall be incorporated as a part of the flexible
connections or in a swing joint arrangement.
D. Groove piping systems shall be separated, analyzed and submitted from threaded or welded
piping systems.
3.6 SEISMIC RESTRAINT - DUCTWORK:
A. Ductwork, four feet square and larger in cross sectional area or 26" diameter and larger shall
be protected in all places by restraints. Locations shall include, but not be limited to:
1. At all equipment connections.
2. At all duct turns and duct run ends (transverse bracing).
3. Transverse bracing to occur 30'-0" O.C. maximum. Rectangular ducts 61" and larger
in either direction may be braced at 32'-0" O.C.
4. Longitudinal bracing shall occur at 60'-0" O.C. maximum.
B. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger size frame using the overall dimensions with
maximum weight for selection of restraint members.
C. No bracing is required if the top of the duct is suspended 12" or less from supporting member
and attached at the top of the duct as well as sides and bottom.
3.7 VIBRATION ISOLATION:
A. General: Furnish and install devices to isolate moving equipment from the structure. Review
isolation furnished with factory package equipment, require conformance with project
criteria.
B. Basic Criteria: Vibration isolation devices which have natural frequencies approximately
1/10 that of the related driving frequency.
C. Equipment to Include:
1. Exhaust Air Fans: Vibration isolated and seismic restrained on inertia base. Inertia
base shall have 1.5 times total weight of assembly.
2. Suspended inline ventilation fans.
3. Propeller relief air fans and ventilation fans.
4. Utility exhaust fans.
D. Field Verify: All required devices and installation.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548 - 6
3.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION - DUCTWORK AND PIPING:
A. Furnish and install devices to isolate all piping and ductwork from other moving equipment.
Provide flex connections, spring hangers, grooved joint couplings for pipe, etc., as required.
END OF SECTION 23 0548
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ACCESSORIES 23 0553 - 1
SECTION 23 0553 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section apply to work of this
section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Label all plumbing, heating, air conditioning, automatic temperature control equipment
(excluding thermostats and relays), and distribution systems. Also label all electrical
switches and starters for all mechanical equipment. Label all fire dampers, fire smoke
dampers, smoke damper access doors.
PART 2 - GENERAL MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.1 EQUIPMENT, PIPE AND DUCT IDENTIFICATION:
A. Equipment:
1. Use the same identification number and name as that shown on the drawings or
in these specifications. Make equipment nameplates of black face formica with
white engraved lettering 3/16" high or larger, attached securely.
2. Include the following information on equipment nameplates where applicable:
Identification name.
Identification number.
Capacity specified.
Actual capacity.
Area or zone served.
Note operating conditions, including head or static pressure, RPM, motor
horsepower at design conditions, area or zone served, name of lubricant,
frequency of lubrication.
B. Valve Identification:
1. For all valves, regardless of size, provide brass tags at least 1-1/4" by 3" in size
and 0.051 inches thick. Use engraved lettering at least 1/8" high. Identify each
valve on the drawing separately, and with valve tags matching the drawing
identification.
2. Provide valve tags which include the following minimum information:
a. Normal Position
b. Duty
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ACCESSORIES 23 0553 - 2
3. Identify tag numbers as follows:
Valve Tags Duty
1-99 HRW
100 SCHW
200 CW
300 DWC & DWH
400 FIRE
500 AIR
600 DEM W
700 GLYCOL
800 STEAM
900 CONDENSATE
4. Make a schedule of all tagged valves, include in O & M Manuals.
5. Connect valve tags to valve stems with brass chain.
C. Color code all accessible duct and piping and identify with wording and arrows every 50
feet, at each riser, at each junction, at each access door, and where required to easily
identify the medium transported.
D. Identify duct and piping systems by:
1. Lettering color, and
2. Flow Direction Arrow.
3. Identifying lettering shall be painted or stenciled on duct or pipe. Self-adhesive
or glue-on type labels are acceptable. Letters shall be 2" high for duct and for 3"
or larger piping, 1" high for 1-1/4" to 2-1/2" pipe, and 1/2" high for 1" pipe and
smaller.
4. Arrows to indicate direction of flow shall be painted or stenciled on the duct or
pipe in the same color as the lettering. The arrow shall point away from the
lettering. On duct and 3" or larger piping, the “shaft” of the arrow shall be 2"
long and 1" wide. Smaller piping, 2-1/2" or less, shall have arrows with a shaft
1/2" wide and 2" long. Use a double-headed arrow if the flow can be in either
direction.
5. Lettering, directional flow arrows and banding colors shall be painted or
stenciled on the duct or pipe. Self-adhesive or glue on labels are acceptable.
6. Piping and duct shall be identified with the following colors:
Medium in Banding Identifying Lettering
Pipe or Duct Color Lettering Color
Water:
Glycol Chilled Water One Blue Glcyol Chilled Water CHWS Black
Supply Supply
Glycol Chilled Water Two Blue Glycol Chilled Water CHWR Black
Return Return
Glycol Heating One Yellow Glycol Heating BHWS Black
Water Supply Two Orange Water Supply
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ACCESSORIES 23 0553 - 3
Glycol Heating One Yellow Glycol Heating BHWR Black
Water Return One Orange Water Return
High Pressure Steam High Pressure Steam HPS Black
High Pressure Cond. High Pressure Cond. HPC Black
Med. Pressure Steam Med. Pressure Steam MPS Black
Med. Pressure Cond. Med. Pressure Cond. MPL Black
Low Pressure Steam Low Pressure Steam LPS Black
Low Pressure Cond. Low Pressure Cond. LPC Black
Cold Air Duct Cold Air Duct (Unit Served)
Return Air Duct Return Air Duct (Unit Served)
Exhaust Air Duct Exhaust Air Duct (Unit Served)
Supply Duct Supply Duct (UnitServed)
Fire, Smoke, Fire/Smoke Damper Fire, Smoke, Access Doors
Fire/Smoke Damper AD – Red
2.2 PANEL IDENTIFICATION:
A. Provide all panel devices on panel faces with engraved black face formica with white
engraved lettering labels.
B. Provide all internal panel components with engraved black face formica labels with white
engraved lettering. Fasten label beneath each device.
C. Numerically or alphabetically, code all panel wiring and tubing.
END OF SECTION 23 0553
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 1
SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design
objectives, including the following:
1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including
submains, branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified
tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
7. Provide new sheaves and change them as required on all fans.
8. Participate fully in commissioning activities as specified in division 019113.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to
reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains,
branches, and terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors
of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat
is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield
repeatable results.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement.
In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the
suction side.
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 2
I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance
ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the
fan was performance tested.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves
the distribution system.
K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
O. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
P. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 90 days from the Contractor's Notice
to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part
3 of this Section.
B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 120 days from the Contractor's Notice to
Proceed, submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-
step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set
of report forms intended for use on this Project.
C. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports
prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing,
adjusting, and balancing Agent.
D. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report
forms.
E. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article
below.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either
AABC or NEBB. Balancing may only be performed by the following:
1. Barnett, Inc., Payson Utah
B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the
Architect's representatives and other members of the Commissioning team on approval of
the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 3
understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of all proposed testing, adjusting,
and balancing team members, HVAC controls installer, and other support personnel.
Provide 14 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include, at a minimum, the following:
a. Contract Documents examination report.
b. Review of the Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Plan, and proposed
TAB forms.
c. Proposed work schedule and Project site access requirements.
d. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors, especially the
Controls Contractor.
e. Coordination with the Commissioning Authority and the Commissioning
team.
f. Coordination and distribution of a “TAB Issues and Issue Resolutions”
log.
g. Coordination of other documentation and communication flow.
C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting,
and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified
testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the
approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and
referenced in this Specification.
D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's "National
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" or from NEBB's "Procedural Standards
for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II,
"Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more
frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building
before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and
balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and
equipment, HVAC controls installers, and/or other mechanics to operate HVAC systems
and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 4
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water
distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
1.8 WARRANTY (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to
discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and
balancing of systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of
the Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,
flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers,
are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of
these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and
for efficient system and equipment operation.
B. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification
Sections have been performed.
C. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,
balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and
their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient
system and equipment operation.
D. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
E. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
F. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify
that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
G. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify
that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
H. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 5
I. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
J. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
K. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction
piping.
L. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare the system readiness reports found in
section 3.23. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required
and access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can
be met.
3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC or NEBB national standards and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing
and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to
those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation
Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material,
including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and
similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 6
3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes
with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
3.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air
systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multizone, dual-
duct, induction-unit supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These
additional procedures are specified in other articles in this Section.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by
the fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as
practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and
transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near
the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream
from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 7
2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps,
heat recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design
static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect
factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur.
Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design to achieve design conditions. Make
required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to
accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult
equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and
measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure
amperage in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to determine the
maximum required brake horsepower.
C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and
adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for
Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets
and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue
to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified
tolerances.
D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's
written instructions and calculating factors.
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified
tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than
extractors and the dampers at the air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of
design quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed
by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 8
3.6 VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the
fan design airflow volume, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-
point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the design
airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly
among the branch ducts. Record which airflow terminals were chosen for this purpose.
B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been
adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a
position that simulates full-cooling load.
2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static
pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering
static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal
unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static
pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge duct losses.
3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within 10 percent of design airflow.
4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to
deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use the terminal unit manufacturer's
written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct,
balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-
volume air systems.
5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to
deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional
reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition
but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return
airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air
ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.
7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-
pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure adequate static
pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.
8. Record the final fan performance data.
C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan
systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Balance systems similar to constant-volume air systems.
2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.
3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to design airflow and verify operation
of the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air
outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air
systems.
4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan, if one
is installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 9
6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure
static pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.
7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to
deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional
reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition
but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow
and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts
and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.
D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan
systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set system at maximum design airflow by setting the required number of
terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so
they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
2. Adjust supply fan to maximum design airflow with the variable-airflow
controller set at maximum airflow.
3. Set terminal units being tested at full-airflow condition.
4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing
progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal
unit to design airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets
downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
6. Measure static pressure at the sensor.
7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow
and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts
and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.
3.7 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at the end
of system and moving towards the pumps. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against
approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in
addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2. Check expansion tank liquid level.
3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest
vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design
flow.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 10
5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do
not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type, unless
several terminal valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing
device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually
operated.
3.8 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-
displacement pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed.
Verify with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for
differences in gage heights. Note the point on the manufacturer's pump curve at
zero flow and confirm that the pump has the intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across
the pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump
discharge valve until design water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower
for the system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare
calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report
conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-
drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow
that is 5 percent greater than design flow.
E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage
over design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over
design flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
F. By-pass valves shall be set to equal the pressure drop of the coil, settings recorded and
balancing device marked.
G. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm,
pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air temperature.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 11
H. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of
balancing.
3.9 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting systems at
maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for
hydronic systems.
3.10 PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system.
3.11 HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Measure water flow through all circuits.
B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.
C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.
D. Measure inlet steam pressure. Check the setting and operation of automatic temperature-
control valves, self-contained control valves, and pressure-reducing valves.
E. Record safety valve settings.
F. Verify operation of steam traps.
3.12 MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds
varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove
proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and
serial numbers, and nameplate data.
C. Report any starter thermal-protection sizing issues in the TAB issues log.
3.13 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 12
1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures.
2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils designed for
more than 5000 cfm.
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.
B. Reheat and Fan Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Entering water temperature.
2. Entering air temperature.
3. Leaving air temperature.
4. Air Flow
3.14 TEMPERATURE TESTING
A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature
regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2
successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final
temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.15 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely
affect control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual
measurements.
D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve
operators.
F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions
and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to
input changes.
G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 13
I. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates
on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
J. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.16 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: + 5 to +10%
2. Positive Pressure Spaces:
a. Supply Air 0 to +10%
b. Exhaust Air 0 to -10%
c. Negative Pressure Spaces:
d. Supply Air 0 to -10%
e. Exhaust Air 0 to +10%
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to -10%
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to -5%
3.17 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing
devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes
and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance
measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare weekly reports (hand-written is acceptable)
to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures.
Include a copy of the “TAB Issues and Issue Resolution” log of any deficiencies and
problems found in systems being tested and balanced.
3.18 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond
paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced
systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing
and balancing engineer.
C. Include the National Project Performance Guarantee issued by AABC or NEBB.
D. Include a detailed narrative describing any discrepancies between the design
requirements and the “as balanced” conditions that exceed the allowable tolerances
described in 3.19 above. Also, list the steps taken and test preformed (with supporting
data) attempting to rectify the condition.
E. Include the final “TAB Issues and Issue Resolutions” log.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 14
F. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the
following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include
approved Shop Drawings and Product Data.
G. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data
in the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
10. Summary of contents, including the following:
a. Design versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
13. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
diameter.
e. VFD settings for variable-air-volume systems.
f. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
g. Door positions for the BSL-3 and Vivarium areas and suites.
h. Fume hood sash height settings
i. Status of the Kitchen Hood and its Make-up VAV
j. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
H. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 15
6. Balancing stations.
I. Equipment Test Reports: For all equipment tested:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: (all elements of
the system that were tested, including air and water flows, static pressures, pump
hoods, inlet and outlet static pressures, inlet, outlet pressure type of coils, rows,
circuits face areas, inlet, outlet wet bulb, dry bulb temperatures, duct sizes tested,
inlet and outlet flows temperatures and pressures and all other pertinent data.
The report to be organized per each item tested.)
a. Total rate in cfm, gpm and lbs/hr.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Motor amps, volts, kW
e. VFD setpoints
f. Starter and Thermal Overload information
g. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
h. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.
i. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
j. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
k. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
l. Outside airflow in cfm.
m. Return airflow in cfm.
n. Outside-air damper position.
o. Return-air damper position.
p. Pitot-tube traverses.
q. Pump suction, discharge, differential pressure, dead-head, and total flow.
r. Summary of all final room pressure relationships by CFM offsets and
inches of WG.
s. List of all TAB generated or manipulated final setpoints for the Phoenix
control valves and VAV boxes. (area factors, correction factors, flow
coefficients, etc…)
J. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593- 16
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.19 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 120 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional
testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout
and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not
performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional
inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
C. Participate in verification of the TAB report, which will consist of repeating any selected
measurement contained in the TAB report where required by the CxA for verification or
diagnostic purposes.
D. The TAB Final Report Verification shall be conducted by the CxA (and possibly other
members of the Cx Team) and will include a field verification of up to 10% of the PTB’s
field readings.
E. The Test and Balance contractor will provide technicians and instrumentation to support
the field verification.
F. Instruments used for the field verification shall be the same instruments (by model and
serial number) that were used for the original TAB work.
G. Failure of an item during the TAB field verification is defined as:
1. For all readings other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent from the
reported value.
2. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 decibels. (Note: variations in
background noise must be considered).
H. A failure of more than 10 percent of the readings tested during the field verification shall
result in the rejection of the final TAB report and require re-balancing of the system(s) in
question.
END OF SECTION 23 0593
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 1
SECTION 23 0700 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23, Section 23 00 00 - General Mechanical Requirements applies to work of this
section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of mechanical insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules as required by the current International Energy Code, and by requirements of
this section. Use no asbestos in this work. Include restorations of insulations of damaged
work including repair of damaged existing insulation due to new work.
B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following:
1. Piping Systems Insulation:
a. Fiberglass.
b. Flexible Unicellular
2. Ductwork System Insulation:
a. Fiberglass.
b. Rigid Flexible Wrap.
3. Equipment Insulation:
a. Fiberglass.
b. Cellular.
c. Flexible Unicellular.
C. Refer to Division 23 section "Supports and Anchors" for protection saddles, protection
shields, and thermal hanger shields.
D. Refer to Division 23 section "Ductwork" for duct linings.
E. Refer to Division 23 section "System Identification" for installation of identification
devices for piping, ductwork, and equipment.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical
insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 2
use in similar service for not less than 3 years.
B. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on
projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project.
C. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets,
coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and
smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each
type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number,
k-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring
insulation.
B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type
of mechanical insulation. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to site in containers with
manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products.
B. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not
install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical insulation
materials of one of the following (except as noted):
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Babcock and Wilcox Co., Insulating Products Div.
3. CertainTeed Corp.
4. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
5. Manville Products Corp.
6. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.
7. Pittsburgh Corning Corp.
8. Rubatex Corp.
9. Thermacell
2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS:
A. PREFORMED FIBERGLASS PIPING INSULATION: ASTM C 547. (Class 1 for use
to 450oF (230oC); Class 2 for use to 650oF (345oC); Class 3 for use to 1200oF (650oC).
B. CELLULAR GLASS PIPING INSULATION: ASTM C 552. (Type I - flat block; Type
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 3
II - pipe and tubing insulation, Class 1 - regular (uncovered), Class 2 - jacketed; Type III
- special shapes; Type IV roof board.
C. JACKETS FOR PIPING INSULATION: All purpose (ASJ) fire retardant jacket, ASTM
C 921, Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient, Type II for piping with
temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all piping at Installers option.
D. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, fastened as
per manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Encase exterior fittings insulation and piping with aluminum jacket with weather-proof
construction.
F. Encase suction diffusers in a removable/replaceable insulating box.
G. Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for
applications indicated.
H. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation
manufacturer for applications indicated.
I. Insulation Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; complying with the following table.
PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE
1/2” to 1-1/2” 4” 20 ga.
2” to 6” 6” 20 ga.
8” to 10 9” 16 ga
12” to 18” 12” 16 ga.
J. Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360 degrees insert of high density, 100 psi,
water-proofed calcium silicate, encased in 360 degrees sheet metal shield. Provide
assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thermal hanger
shields of one of the following:
a. Elcen Metal Products Co.
b. Pipe Shields, Inc.
2.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS:
A. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 1. Class 1 - 400
oF (204oC);
Class 2 - 400oF (204oC); Class 3 - 850oF (454oC); Class 4 - 1000oF (538oC); Class 5 -
1800oF (982oC); Class 1 - 10 lbs/ft3; Class 2, 3 and 4 - 12 lbs/ft3; class 5 - 20 lbs/ft3.
B. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I, Class B-4. Type 1 -
resilient, flexible; Class B-1 - 0.65 lbs/ft3; Class B-2 - 0.75 lbs/ft3; Class B-3 - 1.0 lbs/ft3;
Class B-4 - 1.5 lbs/ft3; Class B-5 - 2.0 lbs/ft3; Class B-6 - 3.0 lbs/ft3; Type II - flexible;
Class F-1 - 4.5 lbs/ft3; Type III - semirigid; Class F-2 - 4.5 lbs/ft3.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 4
C. Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I for ductwork with temperatures
below ambient; Type II for ductwork with temperatures above ambient.
D. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner
angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for
applications indicated.
E. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers,
protective finishes ad similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for
applications indicated.
2.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS:
A. Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 2 to 400
oF, Class 3 to
850oF, Class 4 to 1000oF. (Class 1 - 400oF (204oC); Class 2 - 400oF (240oC); Class 3 -
850oF (454oC); Class 4 - 1000oF (538oC); Class 5 - 1800oF (982oC); Class 1 - 10 lbs/ft3;
Class 2, 3 and 4 - 12 lbs/ft3; Class 5 - 20 lbs/ft3.)
B. Flexible Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 553, B-4. (Type 1 - resilient
flexible; Class B-1 - 0.65 lbs/ft3; Class B-2 - 0.75 lbs/ft3; Class B-3 - 01.0 lbs/ft3; Class B-
4 - 1.5 lbs/ft3; Class B-5 - 2.0 lbs/ft3; Class B-6 - 3.0 lbs/ft3; Type II - flexible; Class F-1 -
4.5 lbs/ft3; Type III - semirigid; Class f-2 - 4.5 lbs/ft3.)
C. Flexible Unicellular Sheet Insulation: ASTM C 534. (Type I - tubular; Type II - sheet.
For use between -40oF (-40oC) and 200oF (93oC) only.)
D. Jackets Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide pre-sized glass cloth jacketing
material, not less than 8 ounces per square yard, or metal jacket at Installer's option,
except as otherwise indicated.
E. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics and
protective finishes as recommended by the insulation manufacturer for applications
indicated.
F. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape corner
angles, anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for
applications indicated.
2.5 PIPING SEALANT THROUGH WALLS: See also Section Mechanical Firestopping.
A. Sealant shall be a two-part foamed silicone elastomer equal to Dow Corning 3-6548
Silicone RTV foam or equivalent by 3M or “Spec Seal” by STI. Sealant shall be applied
at any piping of pipe or duct penetration through fire or smoke walls to prevent air from
passing through the opening.
B. Sealant cell structure, foamed in place, shall be U.L. classified and shall meet the smoke
development and fuel contribution ratings specified. Sealant shall be stable at extreme
temperatures, and shall effectively confine such hazards as fire, smoke and gases.
C. Sealant required at any fire/smoke wall penetration to be according to approved detail for
each specific wall assembly. Contractor shall submit detail for engineer approval.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 5
2.6 PIPE JACKETING:
A. Provide and install jacketing for all insulated pipe exposed in mechanical rooms, fan
rooms and piping located outdoor. This in addition to standard foil on Kraft jacketing
(ASJ). PVC jacketing is not allowed on outdoor piping systems.
1. Steam and Condensate Piping and Glycol Chilled Water Piping (located
outdoors.)
Embossed aluminum - 0.024 thickness.
Preformed aluminum fitting covers.
Banded, lockseam joints, pop-rivet seals.
2. Steam and Condensate Piping (inside)
Embossed aluminum - 0.024 thickness.
Preformed aluminum fitting covers.
Banded, lockseam joints, pop-rivet seals.
3. Domestic water, heating water, chilled water, other insulated piping.
PVC sheets, 0.030" thickness.
PVC formed fitting covers.
Solvent welded joints and seams.
(Provide for removal and expansion.)
B. Color of jacketing selected by Owner.
2.7 COATING OF CHILLED WATER PIPING: After fabrication assembly and installation of
blacksteel chilled water piping (copper and galvanized steel excluded), scrape and brush piping
free of scale, dirt and loose material, and wipe clean with solvent moistened cloth.
A. Using brush or roller coat entire piping surfaces with prime and finish coats of a water
based vinyl acrylic system equivalent to the RustOleum “RustOCrylic” 5700 system or
equivalent by SherwinWilliams. System includes red primer (5769) grey primer (5781)
and black finish coat (5779). Seek a final film thickness in the 4-6 mil range.
B. Allow coating to dry and harden thoroughly before applying insulations.
2.8 FIRE/SMOKE ENCASEMENT:
A. Any and all non plenum rated PVC, and any other plastic piping located in return air and
supply air plenums shall be encased in a flame and smoke rated system. The encasement
shall be equal to Firemaster “Plastic Pipe Fire Protection System.” Install per
manufacturer’s requirements. The enclosure shall meet all codes.
B. Wrap all kitchen exhaust duct to create a 2 hr rating using a flame and smoke rated
system. The wrap shall be continuous from top of each kitchen hood to bottom of each
rooftop kitchen exhaust fan. The wrap shall be equal to FireMaster “FastWrap”. Install
per manufacturer’s requirements. The enclosure shall meet all codes.
C. Cover the bottom of each chase around return air fire damper supply duct and piping with
a flame and smoke rated system to create a 1 hour continuous shaft barrier. The cover
shall be equal to FireMaster “PlenumWrap”. Install per manufacturer’s requirements.
The enclosure shall meet all codes.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL:
A. Piping insulation shall be fiberglass one-piece preformed pipe insulation, class related to
temperature, with all purpose (ASJ) fire retardant jacket, additional jacketing as noted.
B. Fittings and valves shall be insulated and covered with Zeston covers.
C. All cold water, chilled water, roof drains or any other lines upon which condensate
moisture could form, shall have a vapor-proof jacket.
D. Fire and smoke hazard for a complete insulation system shall not exceed:
1. Flame spread - 25
2. Fuel contribution - 50
3. Smoke development - 50
E. Hangers shall not contact pipe where pipe is specified to be insulated.
3.2 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.3 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION:
A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping (except for
handicapped fixtures), air chambers, unions strainers check valves, balance cocks, flow
regulators, drain lines from water coolers, drainage piping located in crawl spaces or
tunnels, fire protection piping, and pre-insulated equipment.
B. Cold Piping:
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems:
a. Potable cold water piping, chilled domestic water supply and return.
b. Interior above-ground storm water piping, including roof drain, deck
drain and landscape drain piping.
c. Plumbing vents within 6 lineal feet of roof or wall outlet.
2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and
thicknesses of insulation:
a. Fiberglass with all service jacket, self sealing lap:
b. 1" thickness, taped and sealed joints.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 7
C. Hot Piping:
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems:
a. Potable hot water piping.
b. Potable hot water recirculating piping.
c. Hot drain piping (where indicated).
2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and
thicknesses of insulation:
a. Fiberglass with all service jacket, self-sealing lap: 1" thick for pipe sizes
up to and including 1-1/2", 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes over 1-1/2".
b. Flexible Unicellular: 1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 2"
(underground only, largest size permitted).
3.4 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION:
A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on hot piping within radiation enclosures or unit
cabinets; on cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan; on
heating piping beyond control valve, located within heated space; on condensate piping
between steam trap and union; and on unions, flanges strainers, flexible connections, and
expansion joints.
B. Cold Piping 40
OF (4.4OC) to Ambient:
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold HVAC piping systems:
a. HVAC make-up water piping.
b. All HVAC chilled water piping.
c. Heat recovery water piping.
2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and
thicknesses of insulation:
a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 2" thick
for pipe sizes over 1-1/2".
C. Hot Pressure Piping (to 250°F):
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot low pressure HVAC
piping systems (steam piping up to 100 psi, water piping up to 200 degrees F).
a. HVAC hot water supply and return piping, valves and fittings.
b. Low pressure steam and condensate piping.
c. Medium pressure steam and condensate piping, valves and fittings.
2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and
thicknesses of insulation:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 8
a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 2" thick
for pipe sizes over 1-1/2".
D. STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SYSTEM:
1. Fiberglass:
a. 2-1/2" thick insulation for high pressure steam pipe sizes up to and
including 2", 3" thick insulation for high pressure steam pipe sizes from
2-1/2" through 4". 4" thick insulation for high pressure steam pipe sizes
from 6" through 8".
b. 2" thick insulation for medium pressure steam pipe sizes up to and
including 1", 2-1/2" thick insulation for medium pressure steam pipe
sizes from 1-1/4" through 4". 3" thick insulation for medium pressure
steam pipe sizes from 6" through 8".
c. 1-1/2" thick insulation for low pressure steam pipe sizes up to and
including 1-1/2", 3" thick insulation for low pressure steam pipe sizes 2”
and larger.
d. 1" thick insulation for condensate pipe sizes up to and including 1", 1-
1/2" thick insulation for condensate pipe sizes from 1-1/4" to 2", 2" thick
insulation for condensate pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger.
E. Insulation of Piping Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by
installing outdoor protective finish or jacketing. Use only impermeable insulations (foam
glass). Cover with aluminum jacketing 0.02" minimum thickness.
3.5 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION:
A. Insulation Not Required: Do not insulate lined ductwork.
B. Hot, Cold and Dual Temperature Ductwork:
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following ductwork:
a. Outdoor air intake ductwork between air entrance and fan inlet or HVAC
unit inlet.
b. HVAC supply ductwork between fan discharge, or HVAC unit
discharge, and room terminal outlet.
(1) Insulate neck and bells of supply diffusers.
c. HVAC return ductwork between room terminal inlet and return fan inlet,
or HVAC unit inlet.
(1) Except omit insulation on return ductwork located in return air
ceiling plenums.
d. HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory or lined.
e. HVAC relief air plenums and ductwork.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 9
2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types
and thicknesses of insulation:
a. Rigid fiberglass: Class 1, 1-1/2" thick, increase thickness to 2" in
machine, fan and equipment rooms.
b. Flexible Fiberglass: Type 1, Class B-4, 1-1/2” lb/ft
3 density, 1-1/2" thick,
application limited to concealed locations.
C. High and Medium Velocity Duct: Insulate externally with type 1, class B-4 (1-1/2 lb/ft
3
density) 1-1/2" thick fiberglass faced duct wrap with factory applied foil scrim Kraft
facing U.L. 723 label.
D. Duct Insulations:
1. Wrap insulation snugly on the ductwork such that maximum thickness is
maintained. Butt all circumferential joints and overlap longitudinal joints a
minimum of 2". Adhere insulation with 4" strips of Insulation Bonding
Adhesive, at 8" on center.
2. On circumferential joints, staple the 2" flange of the facing with 9/16" flare-door
staples on 6" centers and taped with minimum 3" wide foil reinforcing Kraft tape.
Tape all pin penetrations or punctures in the facing.
3.6 EQUIPMENT INSULATION:
A. Cold Equipment (Below Ambient Temperature):
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold equipment:
2. Roof drain bodies.
3. Factory insulated surfaces do not need to be field insulated.
4. Chilled water pump suction diffuser.
B. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types and
thicknesses of insulation:
1. Fiberglass: 2" thick for surfaces above 35
oF (2oC) and 3" thick for surfaces 35oF
(2oC) and lower.
2. Cellular Glass: 3" thick for surfaces above 35
oF (2oC) and 4-1/2" thick for
surfaces 35oF (2oC) and lower.
3. Flexible Unicellular: 1" thick for cold and chilled surfaces.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION:
A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 10
insulation serves its intended purpose.
B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting,
testing and acceptance of tests.
C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run
of piping with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete the run.
Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.
D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to
ensure a complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent
puncture or other damage.
F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness
and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded,
precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is
indicated.
G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping
penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.
H. Provide neatly beveled edge at all terminations and interruptions of insulation.
I. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide
vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor
barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band.
J. Saddles and Shields:
1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide protection saddles or thermal
hanger shields with protection shields under all piping hangers and supports,
factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and thermal shields for
exact fit to mate with pipe insulation.
2. Protection Saddles: See section Supports and Anchors for saddle. Fill interior
voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation.
3. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to
prevent crushing of insulation. Use on pipes 1-1/4" and smaller. Use with
thermal hanger shields for pipes 1-1/2" and larger.
PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE
1/2” TO 1-1/2”4”20 ga.
2” to 6”6”20 ga.
8” to 10”9”16 ga.
12” to 18”12”16 ga.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 11
4. Thermal Hanger Shields: High density calcium silicate encased in 360 degrees
sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation.
Use on pipes 1-1/2" to 8".
3.8 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION:
A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
insulation serves its intended purpose.
B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.
C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to
ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent
puncture and other damage.
E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar
ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.
F. Lined Ductwork: Except as otherwise indicated, omit insulation on ductwork where
internal insulation or sound absorbing linings have been installed.
G. Ductwork Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing
outdoor protective finish or jacketing as recommended by manufacturer.
H. Corner Angles: Install corner angles on external corners of insulation on ductwork in
exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION:
A. General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, and in compliance with recognized industry practices
to ensure that insulation serves intended purpose.
B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces.
Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gapping joints and
excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship.
C. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to prevent
puncture and other damage.
D. Apply insulation using staggered joint method for both single and double layer
construction, where feasible. Apply each layer of insulation separately.
E. Coat insulated surfaces with layer of insulating cement, troweled in workmanlike
manner, leaving smooth continuous surface. Fill in scored block, seams, chipped edges
and depressions, and cover over wire netting and joints with cement of sufficient
thickness to remove surface irregularities.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 12
F. Cover insulated surfaces with all-service jacketing neatly fitted and firmly secured. Lap
seams at least 2". Apply over vapor barrier where applicable.
G. Do not insulate over handholes, cleanouts, ASME stamp, and manufacturer's nameplate.
Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation.
H. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment which must be opened
periodically for maintenance: including metal vessel covers, fasteners, flanges, frames
and accessories.
3.10 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR:
A. Repair damaged sections of mechanical insulation damaged during this construction
period. Use insulation of same thickness as existing insulation, install new jacket lapping
and sealed over existing.
3.11 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT:
A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with
vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.
B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for
insulation work during construction period to avoid damage and deterioration.
END OF SECTION 23 0700
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0900 - 1
SECTION 23 0900 - MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of control systems work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of these control related sections. 1. See following sections for types of Control Systems included as a part of this section. a. Section 23 09 23 - Direct Digital Control Systems b. Section 23 09 33 - Electric Control Systems c. Control sequences are specified in this section under: "Sequence of Operation". B. Related Work: 1. Refer to other Division 23 sections for installation of instrument wells, valve bodies, and dampers in mechanical systems. Not work of this Section. 2. Coordinate with all Division 23 vendors of mechanical equipment, i.e., Glycol Makeup Units, Chillers, etc., which are responsible for furnishing related control sensors and switches which are to be installed in the field by the Mechanical Controls Contractor.
3. Coordinate with Division 26 for fire alarm connections on VFD’s, etc. C. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on controls and/or unit control panels. Includes starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer. 2. Interlock wiring between electrically-operated equipment units; and between equipment and field-installed control devices. a. Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section. D. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division 26 sections: 1. Control wiring between field-installed equipment, controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels. 2. 120 volt service required by control systems.
3. Control Wiring:
a. In concealed locations above lay-in ceilings low voltage conductor may be installed without conduit. Low voltage conductor shall be UL listed Article 725 Plenum Cable. Install the cable parallel to building walls. b. In all other building areas, i.e., electrical rooms, mechanical rooms,
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0900 - 2
above “hard” ceilings, within walls, etc., all control wiring shall be installed in conduit per National Electric Code. Installation shall be square with the walls of the buildings.
c. Number and code all wiring.
d. Use no wire smaller than 16 gauge, no conduit smaller than 1/2". E. Participate in "System Commissioning, Testing and Balancing". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. MANUFACTURERS QUALIFICATIONS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electric control equipment, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. This project shall be base bid using Johnson Controls Generation 4 control components. B. INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firms and workmen specializing and experienced in electric control system installations for not less than 5 years. Installing by Johnson Controls. Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturing, design, and programming of specified and required control components, materials and systems. Approved contractor Johnson Controls. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes of materials, and including installation instructions and start-up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each control system, containing the following information: 1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices, etc. 2. System architecture/communications diagram showing each system controller and interrelated Bacnet MS/TP or Lon Works bus connections to match existing control system in place.
3. Control valve and damper schedules.
4. Floor Plans with control device/enclosure locations. 5. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control. 6. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of work that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. Note contract responsibility to provide complete system regardless of delegation. Completely interface with and show existing installation in the existing building.
7. Provide control panel wiring diagrams. 8. Provide details of faces of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 9. Include verbal written description of sequence of operation. Confirm correct function of proposed sequences. C. Samples: Submit sample of each type of proposed thermostat cover. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists. Include this
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0900 - 3
data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Section 230100.
1.5 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION: A. After a successful acceptance demonstration, the Controls Contractor shall submit as-built drawings of the completed mechanical controls for the project to be incorporated into the overall mechanical as-built drawings for final approval. After receiving final approval, supply "6" complete 11x17 as-built drawing sets, together with AutoCad diskettes to the Owner. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: A. Submit two copies of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Manufacturer's catalog data and specifications on sensors, transmitters, controllers, control valves, damper actuators, gauges, indicators, terminals, and any miscellaneous components used in the system. 2. An operator's manual which will include detailed instructions for all operations of the system. 3. An operator's reference table listing the addresses of all connected input points and output points. Settings shall be shown where applicable. 4. A programmer's manual which will include all information necessary to perform programming functions. 5. A language manual which will include a detailed description of the language used and all routines used by the system. 6. Flow charts of the control software programs utilized in the DDC system. 7. Flow charts of the custom software programs utilized in the DDC system as approved. 8. Complete program listing file and parameter listing file for all programs. 9. A copy of the warranty. 10. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions. 11. Recommended spare parts list. 1.7 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA standards. 2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and devices for electric control systems. 3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control sequences. 4. Comply with NEPA 70, "National Electric Code" for all electrical installation. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment, and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0900 - 4
equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.
INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: (See Section 23 0000) A. Purpose is to provide a transition of the systems from the Contractor to the Owner, leaving the Owner's personnel familiar with and well qualified to operate and maintain the systems. B. Instruction to cover purpose and function of each system and its components, to show proper operating technique, to show proper maintenance technique.
C. Prepare an outline of information to be conveyed, list materials available for reference. Submit to Architect along with a proposed schedule of instruction. Schedule to allow individual time for each trade and each system. D. Convey information in formal classroom session. Teachers to include qualified contractor personnel and sales representatives for each major piece of equipment. Go from the classroom to the actual location to graphically illustrate concepts discussed.
1.9 WARRANTIES: A. As part of the overall project warranty, furnish individual manufacturer warranties for each piece of equipment for a period of not less than one year from date of Owner's beneficial use (substantial completion). B. Warrant the overall assembly of equipment, materials and labor comprising these systems.
1.10 CLEANING AND LUBRICATION: All instruments, control panel and control piping shall be thoroughly cleaned before final acceptance. Provide lubrication for all furnished equipment. 1.11 TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM: A. During the system commissioning, testing and balancing of the various building systems, have a controls representative(s) present and available to interpret and adjust controls as needed. Demonstrate and report the integrity and accuracy of each function and control point.
B. At the termination of the testing period, the Controls representative shall spend one working day instructing the Owner's operating personnel in the control system operation, and one working day checking each system for day-night and manual override with the Owner's operating personnel on each air system. A complete operating booklet shall be provided and used during the training period. Schedule this training with the Owner and Mechanical Contractor. 1. Since system performance is partly a function of climatic conditions, the Controls contractor shall be available during the changing seasons of the warranty period to make further adjustments and modifications if required. A final complete check of all systems shall be made at the conclusion of the one year warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL CABINETS: Furnish stamped steel with hinged door and locking latch control cabinets to protect and conceal all control devices. Arrange components neatly to provide adequate maintenance opportunity and proper device function. Label all components, numerically code all piping and wiring. Terminate all wiring at terminal blocks. Provide engraved plastic labels for all panel face devices. Provide allpanel wiring identification in compliance with BYU-Idaho Standards. A. Provide with surge suppressor - one per panel.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0900 - 5
B. Provide with 120/60/1 outlet - one per panel. C. Provide with fuse - quantity as required. D. Provide with transformer, 120/24 VAC, quantity as required. E. Provide RS-232 service trunk from main panel into each ATC panel for "Laptop" computer access. 2.2 CONTROL DAMPERS: A. In supplying dampers, instruct the sheet metal (233300) workers in the proper installation of the dampers. Ductwork shall be reinforced and the damper properly supported without strain. B. Protect all dampers mounted in a duct system which requires special treatment. C. Provide damper operators with diaphragms or motors of proper size, so that the motors will operate against the static pressure of the systems. Provide each damper motor with a bracket for attaching to ductwork, building structure or equivalent. Damper motors in plenums shall be mounted on damper frames. Do not install motors in ducts. Modulating motors where indicated shall be provided with integral stops for both minimum and maximum stop.
D. Control dampers for outside air, relief air, exhaust air, ventilating air and other dampers exposed to weather temperatures in built-up systems. Low leakage type with spring loaded side seals, inflatable butyl or neoprene fabric edge seals, bronze or Teflon bearings, reinforced galvanized steel blades. Blade orientation as indicated on the Motorized Damper Equipment Schedule. Air leakage shall not exceed 10 CFM per square foot at 4" upstream static pressure. Johnson "Proportion-Aire" D-1200/D-1300. Ruskin CD-50 Greenheck VCD-43 E. Electric Damper Actuators: Reference Section 230933 for 120 volt damper actuators and Section 230923 for 24 volt damper actuators. 2.3 CONTROL VALVES: A. General: 1. Furnish automatic control valves required by the project. Design valves to pass the quantities of fluid at the pressure drop scheduled on the drawings. 2. Mount all control valves with stems in the up-vertical position.
B. Control Valve Sizes:
1. Valve sizes 2-1/2” through 6” used for controlling heating water, chilled water and up to 50% propylene glycol: Valve body shall be flanged, ANSI Class 125, globe style with cast iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel stem, metal to metal seat, EDPM O-ring packing with equal percentage or linear flow characteristics. Valves shall be of the 2-way or 3-way type as indicated on the Control Valve Schedule. Provide a 5 year manufacturer warranty on the control valves. Siemens Flowrite™ VF 599 Series or equal by T.A.C. or Belimo. 2. Valve sizes 1/2” through 2” used for controlling heating water, chilled water and up to 50% propylene glycol: Valve body shall be threaded, ANSI Class 250, ball style with brass body, stainless steel ball and stem, glass filled PTFE with EPDM O-ring ball seals and steam seals. The valve shall be available in straight through or 3-way mixing with three connections as indicated on the Control
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0900 - 6
Valve Schedule. Minimum close off rating - 200 psi. Provide a 5 year manufacturer warranty on the control valves. Siemens 599 Series or equal by T.A.C. or Belimo.
C. Control Valve Operators / Actuators: Reference Section 230923.
PART 3 - CONTROL SEQUENCES 3.1 GENERAL: A. Provide control systems to manage and manipulate mechanical equipment in a functional and energy conserving way.
B. Provide control panels in the central fan rooms and mechanical rooms, with terminal block connections for interface of converters, pumps, fans, VAV boxes, etc. C. Install control communication wiring per the National Electric Code. Reference Section 230923 for additional detail. D. Set up separate control loops for each major fan system with options to favor one system over another, or to have each system independent if the building area is physically isolated from other buildings on campus. 3.2 CENTRAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM: A. Central Control Units shall provide for overall control and monitoring of the Building System. B. DDC panels shall also provide programmable time clock functions, optimum start, and signals to ATC panels and report space temperature and condition of air handling systems and other mechanical systems. C. Locate DDC panels in mechanical rooms and in rooms as shown on the drawings or as directed in the field.
D. Provide a run time accumulator function on all pieces of HVAC equipment 5 HP and above. 3.3 CAMPUS INTERFACE: A. Connect new control systems into the existing Building Automation System in place.
3.4 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU-300, AHU-400A & AHU-400B)
CONSTANT VOLUME SUPPLY FAN WALL STATIC PRESSURE CONTROL SEQUENCE:
A. In automatic mode, each supply fan VFD starts through its respective VFD controller via
the DDC system, all safeties satisfied. In “Hand”, the supply fans will run when all
safeties are satisfied.
B. The speed of each air handling unit’s supply fan VFD’s shall be manually controlled and
adjusted through their respective VFD controllers and will be set at the time each system
is balanced to maintain air flow rates as scheduled on drawings and will be controlled at
that speed until the owner changes the parameters. The supply fan wall VFD controllers
shall adjust the signal to the respective supply fan VFD’s to compensate for filter loading,
in order to maintain constant duct pressure for each system based on an input signal from
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0900 - 7
the respective filter differential pressure sensor or to maintain the high or low limit
discharge temperature settings as described below. The DDC controller will provide a 4-
20 ma input signal to the supply fan wall VFD’s. See Specifications under Section
230513 related to the variable speed drives.
C. Interlock the variable speed drives for each unit to the building fire alarm and to the
respective safeties relay to provide shutdown upon smoke detection, high and low duct
pressure and freezing conditions. Interlock the supply fan wall variable speed drive
controllers with the respective return / relief fan variable speed drive controllers. Activate
the respective supply fan wall controllers through the central control panel.
D. Interlock each unit’s outside air and relief air damper to close when the respective supply
fans are off or during unoccupied mode.
E. Close the respective chilled water control valve to each unit’s cooling coil when each
unit’s supply fans are off or during unoccupied mode.
F. Open the respective heating water control valve to each unit’s heating coil when each
unit’s supply fans are off or during unoccupied mode.
G. During occupied mode, each unit’s outside air damper opens at least to minimum position
when the respective supply fans run.
3.5 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU-300) TEMPERATURE CONTROL
SEQUENCE:
A. The DDC system shall control the system temperature for each system.
B. For each system, a control loop sensing the respective space temperature input will
modulate the unit’s chilled water valve or heating water valve to maintain the space
temperature set point.
C. Reference Paragraph 3.12 for minimum outside air control sequence. The economizer
control shall override the minimum outside air when outside conditions allow for free
cooling. The return air dampers shall track the outside air dampers.
D. On call for cooling, when the outside air temperature is favorable operate each unit
operates in an economizer cycle by modulating that unit’s the return air and outside air
dampers to maintain a mixed air temperature of 55°F (adj.), optimized for minimum
mechanical cooling. Reset the low limit along with the chilled water control valves to
use outside air for cooling. Once the outside air temperature exceeds 75°F (adj.), the
outside air dampers shall close to minimum position.
E. If the discharge air temperature set point for each unit cannot be met by the use of outside
air, the chilled water control valves shall modulate open to provide chilled water to the
cooling coil(s). The chilled water return temperature related to each chilled water control
valve shall be sensed with input into the system controller to ensure that the chilled water
is being fully utilized.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0900 - 8
F. On call for heating, the respective unit’s heating water control valve shall modulate open
through the DDC system to provide heating water to the heating coil in order to satisfy
the heating space temperature set point of 72°F (adj.). The heating discharge temperature
high limit shall be set at 95°F (adj.).
3.6 CHILLED WATER RETURN TEMPERATURE CONTROL SEQUENCE: A. For air handling systems AHU-300 the cooling coil chilled water return temperature shall be sensed with input into the respective system controller to ensure that the chilled water serving the building is being fully utilized. When each cooling coil CHWR temperature is at set point or above, the respective cooling coil chilled water control valve modulates open as needed to maintain the CHWR set point allowing building CHWR to flow back to the Central Plant. When the CHWR temperature is below set point, the respective cooling coil chilled water control valve modulates closed as needed to maintain the delta T set point between CHWR and CHWS serving the respective cooling coil. The building CHW system is conversely made up from CHWS from the Central Plant.
3.7 NIGHT SET BACK CONTROL SEQUENCE:
A. The packaged pool heat recovery unit operate 24 hours a day to maintain occupied set
point conditions.
B. The building DDC system has all other building air handling units off during unoccupied
hours. Should the unoccupied temperature drop to 65°F, the space sensor or combined
average space sensors controlling the VAV boxes activates the constant volume air
handling units and VAVR systems heating functions until the temperature rises to 65°F.
3.8 MINIMUM OUTSIDE AIR CONTROL SEQUENCE:
A. The outside air dampers serving the respective air handling systems modulate open to
minimum position as specified and as needed to lower the CO2 and volatile organic
concentration levels below set point.
3.9 CO2 AND VOC MONITORING:
A. Where indicated on the Control Diagrams, the CO2 and volatile organic sensors measure
concentration levels in the return air stream entering each air handling system in order to
modulate the respective units outside air damper in order to keep these levels below the
maximums allowed.
B. Sensed high concentration levels are alarmed at the central DDC system.
3.10 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU-300) RETURN / RELIEF FAN
WALL STATIC PRESSURE CONTROL SEQUENCE (Control Sequence for Return / Relief
Fans RRF-88 & 89 if the Base Bid is Selected, or Return / Relief Fans RRF-1 & 2 if Additive
Alternate No. 1 is Selected, Similar. DDC System Controls Return/Relief Fan VFD’s Directly):
A. Each Return / Relief Fan wall shall be provided with a VFD controller with an H-O-A
switch by Division 23.
B. In auto none of the return/relief fan walls can run if the respective supply fan wall is off.
In hand or bypass, each return / relief fan will run.
C. The automation system controls the return/relief fans and the relief dampers.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0900 - 9
D. Building differential pressure sensors for each system, located in the respective space,
send a signal to the central automation system. Each system shall be set to maintain a
0.05" positive space pressure related to outside and adjacent spaces with swimming
pools.
E. On signal from the building automation system, the respective relief air dampers
modulate open as needed to maintain the respective space differential pressure set point.
F. Return/relief fan wall VFD(s) are to be controlled from their respective return air plenum
differential pressure sensors to maintain required differential pressure set point in each
return air plenum. The set points to be determined with input from the balancing
contractor, during the balancing process.
G. The return/relief fan wall VFD(s) will establish the speed for their respective return/relief
fans.
END OF SECTION 23 0900
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 1
SECTION 23 0923 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: See Section 230900.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The scope of work shall include all labor, material, and equipment
necessary to complete the temperature control work for the entire project.
A. Interlock with a BACnet signal from the existing Building Automation System (BAS) to
the Pool Water heat exchangers which allow the Pool Water Heat Exchangers to operate.
B. Extend and connect control wiring from indicated control components to new Local
Application Specific Controllers serving each new Air Handling Unit or Pool Heat
Recovery Unit located in the local fan room or inside the control panel provided with the
roof mounted units.
C. Extension of BACnet communication wiring from the existing BAS to each new Air
Handling Unit Local Application Specific Controller.
D. Adjustment and validation of modified and new control systems. Instruction of Owner's
representative on maintenance and operation of modified and new control equipment.
E. Remote Monitoring and Control Communications capability through direct
communication to the Owner’s existing Metasys Central Operators Workstation.
F. The modified system shall include but not be limited to controls and equipment as
hereinafter specified.
1. Air Handling Systems
2. Building Static Pressure Control
3. Pool Heat Recovery System
4. Exhaust Fan Control
5. Variable Air Volume Boxes
6. Control of Pool Water Heat Exchangers
7. Miscellaneous - Ventilation Systems, Cabinet Heaters.
8. Other Systems
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: See Section 230900.
A. This specification wording is based on Johnson Controls, Inc. Metasys System product
line which is the existing building automation system in place.
1.4 SUBMITTALS: See Section 230900.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: See Section 230900.
1.6 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: See Section 230900.
1.7 WARRANTIES: See Section 230900.
1.8 CLEANING AND LUBRICATION: See Section 230900.
1.9 TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM: See Section 230900.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL CABINETS: See Section 230900.
A. Panel mount all controllers and devices other than remote sensors and operators. Provide
permanent labels, terminal blocks, etc.
2.2 CONTROL SOURCES:
A. POWER SUPPLY:
1. Furnish complete power supply for all new application controllers at appropriate
voltage and in adequate capacity. Provide multiple power supply devices, mount
conveniently in Mechanical Room or spaces as directed. Load power supply
units to no more than 70 percent of nameplate capacity.
2. Run all power wiring in conduit, neatly arranged and coordinated with other
trades. Plenum rated cable may be used above fully accessible ceilings only.
Securely anchor and note in organized fashion.
3. Group boxes served by each power supply unit in proximity, provide permanent
mounted schedule of boxes served by each power supply.
B. COMMUNICATIONS CONDUCTORS:
1. Connect each and every new Application Specific Controller (ASC) into the
existing Network Control Units (NCU) extending back to the Central
Microprocessor with required conductors. Avoid common conduit with AC
voltage or inductive loads. All in accordance with National Electric Code,
conductors either plenum rated cable or installed in conduit (3/4" minimum).
The LAN Network shall be twisted pair or coax.
2. Utilize existing central communications panel and fiber optic hub.
3. Utilize existing communications from hub back to Physical Plant.
2.3 DAMPERS: See Section 230900.
2.4 ELECTRIC DEVICES: See Section 230933.
2.5 DIRECT DIGITAL SYSTEM CONTROLLERS (DDC):
A. Connect to existing in place.
2.6 NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS:
A. Existing:
2.7 STANDALONE NETWORK CONTROL UNITS (NCU):
A. GENERAL: Standalone NCU panels shall be microprocessor based, multi-tasking,
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 3
multi-user, real-time digital control processors. Each standalone NCU panel shall consist
of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers,
power supplies, and input/output modules.
B. CAPABILITY: Each new NCU panel shall have 2 Meg of DRAM memory, an 80186
processor, 64K EPROM and 4 communication ports. Each new NCU panel shall support
its own operating system and databases including:
1. Control processes
2. Energy Management Applications
3. Alarm Management
4. Historical/Trend Data for all points
5. Maintenance Support Applications
6. Custom Processes
7. Operator I/O
8. Dial-Up Communications
9. Manual Override Monitoring
C. POINT TYPES: Each NCU panel shall support the following types of point inputs and
outputs:
1. Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts
2. Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control
3. Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position
measurements either electric or pneumatic
4. Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity control of
primary equipment either electric or pneumatic
5. Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring
D. CONTINUOUS 24 HOUR POINT HISTORIES: Each NCU panel without software
programming by the operator shall store Point History Files for every analog and binary
input and output points.
1. The Point History routine shall continuously and automatically sample the value
of all analog inputs at half hour intervals. Samples for all points shall be stored
for the past 24 hours to allow the user to immediately analyze equipment
performance and all problem-related events for the past day. Point History Files
for binary input or output points and analog output points shall include a
continuous record of the last ten status changes of commands for each point.
** NOTE: This feature must be demonstrated on the portable operator terminal.
E. SERIAL COMMUNICATION PORTS: Standalone NCU panels shall provide at least
two RS-232C serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple
operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, laptop workstations, PC
workstations, and panel mounted or portable NCU panel Operator's Terminals.
Standalone NCU panels shall allow temporary use of portable devices without
interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers, or network
terminals.
F. HARDWARE OVERRIDE SWITCHES: The operator at the NCU panel shall have the
ability to manually override the NCU Panel terminated points via local, point discrete,
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 4
onboard hand/auto operator override switches for binary control points and gradual
switches for electronic or pneumatic analog control type points. These override switches
shall be operable whether the panel is powered or not.
G. HARDWARE OVERRIDE MONITORING: NCU panels shall monitor the status or
position of all overrides, and include this information in logs and summaries to inform
the operator that automatic control has been placed in hardware override. NCU panels
shall also collect override activity information for daily and monthly reports.
H. LOCAL STATUS INDICATOR LAMPS: The NCU panel with terminated points, shall
provide local status indication for each binary input and output for constant, up-to-date
verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device.
I. INTEGRATED ON-LINE DIAGNOSTICS: Each NCU panel shall continuously
perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all subsidiary
equipment. The NCU panel shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any
detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication
of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each NCU panel, and shall not require the
connection of an operator I/O device.
J. SURGE AND TRANSIENT PROTECTION: Isolation shall be provided at all network
terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients
consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980. Isolation levels shall be sufficiently high as to
allow all signal wiring to be run in the same conduit as high voltage wiring where
acceptable by electrical code.
K. POWERFAIL RESTART: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an
orderly shutdown of all standalone NCU panels to prevent the loss of database or
operating system software. Non-Volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical
controller configuration data, and battery back-up shall be provided to support the
real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.
1. Upon restoration of normal power, the NCU panel shall automatically resume
full operation without manual intervention.
2. Should NCU panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the
capability of reloading the NCU panel via the local area network, via the local
RS-232C port, or via telephone line dial-in.
3. Each Control Module within an NCU shall have separate independent power
supplies with OFF/ON switches to allow operator to remove individual control
modules without powering down the entire NCU panel.
4. Each NCU panel shall have a build-in duplex power outlet for operator use.
5. NCU panels shall provide communications points as follows to meet the project
design requirements:
6. 1 Slot Network Communications Interface Only
7. 2 Slot Network Communications PLUS;
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 5
a. 10 Analog Input & 10 Analog Output Points
b. (Pneumatic or Electric)
c. or32 Binary Input Points
d. or8 Binary Output & 8 Binary Output Points
8. 5 Slot Network Communications PLUS;
a. 20 Analog Input & 20 Analog Output Points
b. (Pneumatic or Electric)
c. or 64 Binary Input Points
d. or16 Binary Input & 16 Binary Output Points
e. orAny Combination of 2 of the Above 2 Slot Configurations.
2.8 NCU SOFTWARE FEATURES:
A. GENERAL:
1. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this
specification shall be provided.
2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral
part of the NCU panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level
computer for execution.
B. CONTROL SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION:
1. Pre-Tested Control Algorithms: The NCU panels shall have the ability to
perform the following pre-tested control algorithms:
a. Two Position Control
b. Proportional Control
c. Proportional plus Integral Control
d. Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control
e. Automatic Control Loop Tuning
2. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for
limiting the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any
one-hour period.
3. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive
demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time
delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.
4. Powerfail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the NCU panel
shall analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal
occupancy scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume
normal operation.
2.9 ENERGY MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS: NCU Panels shall have the ability to perform
any or all of the following energy management routines:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 6
A. Time of Day Scheduling
B. Calendar Based Scheduling
C. Holiday Scheduling
D. Temporary Schedule Overrides
E. Optimal Start
F. Optimal Stop
G. Night Setback Control
H. Fan Speed/CFM Control
I. Heating/Cooling Interlock
J. Cold Deck Reset
K. Mixed Air
L. Minimum Outside Air
M. Hot Water Reset
N. Chilled Water Reset
O. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention,
and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization.
2.10 CUSTOM PROCESS PROGRAMMING CAPABILITY: NCU panels shall be able to execute
custom, job-specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and
special control routines.
A. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom
process:
1. Any system-measured point data or status
2. Any calculated data
3. Any results from other processes
4. User-Defined Constants
5. Arithmetic functions (+,-,*,/, square root, exp, etc.)
6. Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.)
7. On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers
8. Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination
of the following:
a. Time interval
b. Time of day
c. Date
d. Other processes
e. Time programming
f. Events (e.g., point alarms)
9. Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or
calculated data from any and all other NCU panels on the local area network.
10. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and
all other NCU panels on the local area network.
11. Advisory/Message Generation: Processes shall be able to generate operator
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 7
messages and advisories to any devices. A process shall be able to directly send
a message to a specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file, or
cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a printer
or pager.
12. Custom Process Documentation: The graphics programming language (GPL) for
custom control programs shall be self-documenting. All inter-relationships
defined by GPL feature shall be documented via graphical flowcharts and
English language descriptors.
13. Note: For owner's ability to add or modify custom programs, without the
requirements of the manufacturer's involvement, the ATC Contractor shall
provide and install, in the Central Operator's Workstation, Graphics
Programming Language software.
2.11 ALARM MANAGEMENT: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct
alarm reports to operator devices and memory files. Each NCU panel shall perform distributed,
independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical
alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the NCU
panel's ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at a PC Workstation or local
I/O device, or communications with other panels on the network.
A. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the
point's English language description, and the time and date of occurrence.
B. Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point.
Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response
to critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. Each NCU
panel shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown
and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each
point.
C. The user shall also be able to define under which conditions point changes need to be
acknowledged by an operator, and/or sent to follow-up files for retrieval and analysis at a
later date.
D. Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user-defined list
of operator devices, or PCs used for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall also be
automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary device is found to be
off-line.
E. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user
shall be able to print, display or store a 65-character alarm message to more fully describe
the alarm condition or direct operator response.
F. Each standalone NCU panel shall be capable of storing a library of at least 250 Alarm
Messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the panel.
2.12 HISTORICAL DATA AND TREND ANALYSIS: A variety of Historical data collection
utilities shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the
following ways.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 8
A. Continuous 24 Hour Point Histories: Standalone NCU panels shall store Point History
Files for all analog and binary inputs and outputs.
B. The Point History routine shall continuously and automatically sample the value of all
analog inputs at half hour intervals. Samples for all points shall be stored for the past 24
hours to allow the user to immediately analyze equipment performance and all
problem-related events for the past day.
1. Point History Files for binary input or output points and analog output points
shall include a continuous record of the last ten status changes or commands for
each point.
2. Control Loop Performance Trends: Standalone NCU panels shall also provide
high resolution sampling capability with an operator-adjustable resolution of
10-300 seconds in one-second increments for verification of control loop
performance.
3. Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary
data shall also be assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting
operator-specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample
intervals of 1 minute to 2 hours, in one-minute intervals, shall be provided. Each
standalone NCU panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall be
capable of storing a minimum of 5000 data samples.
4. Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the Standalone NCU
panels, and uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. Uploads shall
occur based upon either user-defined interval, manual command, or when the
trend buffers become full. All trend data shall be available in disk file form for
use in 3rd Party personal computer applications.
2.13 RUNTIME TOTALIZATION: Standalone NCU panels shall automatically accumulate and store
runtime hours for binary input and output points.
A. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
B. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization.
Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
2.14 ANALOG/PULSE TOTALIZATION: Standalone NCU panels shall automatically sample,
calculate and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user-selected
analog and binary pulse input-type points.
A. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9
units (e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons. etc.).
B. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
C. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages
shall be generated when the limit is reached.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 9
2.15 EVENT TOTALIZATION: Standalone NCU panels shall have the ability to count events such as
the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be
performed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis.
A. The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a
minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset.
B. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages
shall be generated when the limit is reached.
2.16 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC):
A. Each fan system/air handler or VAV boxes shall be controlled by a stand-alone DDC
controller. The controller shall include all hardware and programs.
B. The DDC controller application programs shall reside in the DDC controller providing
stand-alone control when host communication is not possible. The application program
shall be maintained at the DDC controller in E2PROM. The default database, i.e.,
setpoints and configuration information, shall be stored in E2PROM.
C. DDC controllers requiring the application or database to be downloaded from a host shall
not be acceptable. The zone controller shall run the control application using the default
setpoints and configuration even after a power failure with host disabled.
D. Controllers integrated with pneumatic damper actuators shall be furnished with electric to
pressure function modules.
1. Function modules shall have a manual/auto override selection mode with an
on/off switch for binary outputs, 0-20 psi hand gradual switch for pneumatic
outputs.
E. Each Standalone NCU Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through the
use of remote Application Specific Controllers (ASCs).
F. Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control
responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a
microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor.
G. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data bases
including:
1. Generic Input/Output Monitor & Control
2. Control Processes
3. Energy Management Applications
4. Operator I/O (Portable Service Terminal)
H. Application Specific Controllers shall directly support the temporary use of a portable service
terminal. The capabilities of the portable service terminal shall include but not be limited to the
following:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 10
1. Display temperatures
2. Display status
3. Display setpoints
4. Display control parameters
5. Override binary output control
6. Override analog setpoints
7. Modification of gain and offset constants
8. Modified selected HVAC configuration programs and down load modifications.
I. Each ASC shall be able to accept nickel resistant, voltage or current input sensors.
2.17 POWERFAIL PROTECTION: All system setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any
other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration does not
necessitate reprogramming the controller.
2.18 APPLICATION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE: A pre-written ASC HVAC software program shall be
provided to the owner with common ASHRAE HVAC sequences of operations for single zone,
multizone, VAV units. This software program shall have pre-written sequences of operations where the
owner can select system designs, with prompted default values or configure HVAC ASC for generic
input/output for monitor and control.
A. Software program shall be capable of printing out owner selected sequence of operation,
setpoints, and ASC predetermined wire termination guide for each input/output point.
B. Prior to putting Application Specific Controller on-line in an HVAC operating environment, the
application specific software shall have a commissioning mode, so the owner can simulate the
control sequence through assigning default values or by actual, connecting hardware to the ASC
Controller at the owner's lab or test bench.
2.19 UNITARY CONTROLLERS:
A. Unitary Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following types of systems with
prewritten application specific software:
1. Generic Input/Output Monitor and Control
2. Cabinet Heaters
B. Unitary Controllers shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs:
1. Economizer Switchover Inputs
a. Drybulb
b. Outdoor Air Enthalpy
c. Differential Temperature
d. Binary Input from a separate controller
2. Economizer Outputs
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 11
a. Integrated Analog with minimum position
b. Binary output to enable self-contained economizer actuator
3. Heating and Cooling Outputs
a. 1 to 3 Stages
b. Analog Output with two-pipe logic
c. Reversing valve logic for Heat Pumps
4. Fan Output
a. On/Off Logic Control
C. Unitary controllers shall support pre-written software configured control strategies, or generic
monitor and control for future expansion or retrofit for:
1. Daily/Weekly Schedules
2. Comfort/Occupancy Mode
3. Economy Mode
a. Standby Mode/Economizer Available
b. Unoccupied/Economizer Not Available
c. Shutdown
d. Lighting Logic Interlock to Economy Mode
4. Temporary Override Mode
a. Temporary Comfort Mode (Occupancy-Base Control)
b. Boost (Occupant Warmer/Cooler Control
D. Occupancy-Based Standby/Comfort Mode Control: Each Unitary Controller shall have a
provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a manual wall
switch or an occupancy sensing device, the Unitary Controller shall automatically select either
Standby or Comfort mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while satisfying
comfort conditions.
E. Occupancy-Based Zone Lighting Control: Unitary Controllers shall provide an auxiliary binary
output to serve as the interface to an associated lighting relay. Based upon the status of either an
occupancy sensing device, or manual wall switch, the Unitary Controller shall provide a contact
output to automatically adjust the lighting level to accommodate occupant requirements while
reducing electrical consumption. Standby/Comfort (described in the previous section) and
Lighting overrides shall be served by the same occupancy override input.
2.20 ALARM MANAGEMENT: Each Unitary Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring
and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.
A. Minimum point type and quantity shall be as follows:
1. Analog Inputs - 6
2. Binary Inputs - 4
3. Binary Outputs - 6 or 8
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 12
4. Analog Outputs - 2 or 0 with 8 binary outputs
2.21 AHU CONTROLLERS:
A. AHU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of systems
with prewritten application specific software:
1. Generic Input/Output Monitor and Control
2. Large Air Handling Units
3. Mixed Air-Single Path
a. Mixed Air-Dual Path
b. 100% Single Path
c. 100% Dual Path
B. AHU Controller shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified
control sequences in a totally standalone fashion. The minimum point type and quantity shall be
as follows:
1. Analog Inputs - 8
2. Binary Inputs - 8
3. Binary Outputs - 10
4. Analog Outputs - 6
C. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified
control sequences in a totally standalone fashion.
D. AHU controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to perform HVAC
sequence of operation or generic input/output monitor and control, without the operator having to
use programming languages.
2.22 OCCUPANCY-BASED STANDBY/COMFORT MODE CONTROL: Each AHU Controller shall have
a provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a manual wall switch
or an occupancy sensing device, the AHU Controller shall automatically select either Standby or Comfort
mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while satisfying comfort conditions.
2.23 ALARM MANAGEMENT: Each AHU Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and
analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.
2.24 VAV BOX CONTROLLER: (One for each box.) The ATC contractor shall furnish pressure independent
digital electronic VAV box controllers and accessories and make field installations to accomplish the
procedures and sequences as indicated in Sections 23 05 93 and 23 09 00.
A. VAV controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following types of systems:
1. Single Duct
2. Single Duct with Reheat
3. Supply/Exhaust
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 13
B. VAV controllers shall support prewritten software configured control strategies:
1. Pressure Dependent
2. Pressure Independent
3. Variable Volume
4. Constant Volume
5. Auto Zero of Flow Transducers
C. Each VAV zone controller shall be a standalone DDC controller. The controller shall include all
hardware and software required for communication with the local Network Control Unit (NCU).
D. The control program shall reside in the VAV zone controller. The application program shall be
maintained in ROM. The default database, ie. Setpoints and configuration information, shall be
stored in EEPROM.
E. Each VAV controller shall have a provision for setback, setup, shutdown, or morning warmup
and cooldown.
F. Each VAV controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the
contact status of either a manual wall switch or an occupancy sensing device.
G. Communications to the local NCU shall be at least 9600 baud.
H. Minimum point type and quantity shall be a follows:
1. Analog Inputs 6
2. Binary Inputs 4
3. Analog Outputs2 or 0
4. Binary Outputs 6 or 8
2.25 ZONE SENSOR: (Room Thermostat)
A. The Zone sensor shall be a Johnson Controls TE-6000 with programming jack series or equal.
Sensor cover shall be a beige high impact plastic cover with brushed aluminum face. Sensor
dimensions shall not exceed 3" x 4" and shall not protrude from the wall more than 2".
1. Sensors with a no external controls shall be installed in all transient areas.
2. Sensors with override switches shall be installed in all open work areas and multiple
private office zones.
3. Sensors with override switches and setpoints shall be installed in all single zone private
offices and conference rooms.
4. Provide a mechanism for adjusting setpoint within a limited range at the sensor. Provide
legend indicating the graduated scale temperature setpoints on the sensor face.
5. Provide an override switch to signal the controller when the zone is occupied.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 14
6. The temperature sensor shall be a high quality, high output, wire wound nickel resistant
sensor. The temperature sensing element shall be mounted under the aluminum faceplate
allowing the sensor appropriate response to the zone's thermal elements. Installed
accuracy shall be +1oF over a 32oF to 86oF range.
7. The zone sensor shall include a jack for connection of the service tool. To prevent
unauthorized tampering and vandalism, the jack shall be mounted under the sensor's
cover. The cover shall be held in place by a recessed socket head set screw requiring an
Allen wrench for removal. Sensors having the service tool jack exposed shall not be
accepted.
2.26 VAV BOX VELOCITY SENSING: (For Air Control Boxes - VAV Boxes)
A. Control shall be pressure independent using velocity pressure sensing to determine flow rate. The
sensor shall be a Johnson DPT-2000 or equivalent. The velocity sensor shall use pressure
differential technology and operate from .02" to 6" wg. The auto reset minimum CFM shall be set
by the air balancer.
B. The VAV box air flow sensing tube shall be furnished and install by the VAV box supplier prior
to shipment to the project sight.
2.27 AIR CONTROL BOX ACTUATOR:
A. The air valve shall be positioned by a dual synchronous 3-point floating motor provided by
Johnson Controls, Inc. series EDP-2040, or equivalent. The motor shall operate the damper from
full closed to full open no faster than 4 minutes and no slower than 8 minutes. Motor gears and
housing shall be metallic to insure long motor life.
B. The motor assembly shall slip over the damper shaft and lock into position using knurled set
screws. Rotation shall be adjustable from 30o to 90o in a clockwise or counter-clockwise
direction. The motor frame shall be mounted to the box with no more than three screws. To
minimize maintenance costs over the life of the installation, the gear motor shall be a separate
component. Motors which are an integral part of the controller shall not be accepted.
C. Damper motors for the VAV Boxes shall be electric direct mount actuator with a magnetic clutch
to provide torque protection. Actuator shall have an adjustable rotation from 30 to 90 degrees,
clockwise or counter-clockwise. The actuator shall be capable of having a one, two or six minute
travel time. Each actuator shall have manual override, gear release lever. Actuators shall be of
the push-pull type for either modulating or two positioning control. Actuators shall stroke by a
rotating motion of an overload-proof synchronous motor. Control voltage shall be either 24 VAC
or 0-20 VDC as required by the application. Actuators shall be available with spring return to the
fully extended position upon power failure. Three (3) point floating actuator shall be available
with adjustable end switches. Minimum/maximum manual positioners shall be available for
proportional motors. Belimo
2.28 APPLICATION SPECIFIC FUNCTION MODULES:
2.29 RELAY KIT (RLY): A relay kit with manual override switch shall be furnished and installed on all
digital outputs signals for start/stop of the Air Handling Units and associated equipment. The relay kits
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 15
shall be installed for ease of maintenance and manual overriding of binary output points. Each relay kit
shall have the following built-in features:
A. Auto/Manual Switch to Enable/Disable Local Control
B. Separate On/Off Buttons for Override Control
C. Local Relay Kit Monitoring Contact to advise the operator at the NCU or Operator's Workstation
if any of the Auto/Manual Switches have been placed in the Manual Override Position.
D. Override switches shall be able to operate the motor loads or starter coils whether the controller is
powered or de-energized.
2.30 INPUT ANALOG PRESSURE (IAP): When required to interface pneumatic inputs to an ASC or NCU,
and IAP shall be installed to convert the pneumatic pressure to a voltage output.
2.31 ELECTRIC DAMPER ACTUATORS FOR OUTSIDE, RETURN, AND RELIEF DAMPERS AND
OTHER ACTUATORS REQUIRING SPRING RETURN:
A. Electronic direct-coupled actuators shall be provided. The actuator shall be fastened to the
damper shaft via a clamp assembly of a V bolt design, with associated V shaped toothed cradle.
Where direct-couple mounting is not feasible, provide factory cataloged brackets, mounting kits,
and hardware. All outside air, return air, relief air, return/relief air and exhaust air motorized
dampers shall be provided with an internal mechanical spring return mechanism built into the
actuator housing. Non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operations shall not be acceptable. Spring
return actuators shall be capable of CW or CCW mounting. All outside air, relief air and exhaust
air dampers shall be normally closed. All return air and return/relief air dampers shall be
normally open. The actuators shall be of sufficient capacity to provide a minimum of 5 in-
lb/sq.ft. for opposed blade dampers and 7 in-lb/sq.ft. for parallel blade dampers. All actuators
shall be brushless DC motors. Mounting shall provide for servicing and proper alignment with
the damper shaft to minimize drag and slippage on the shaft.
B. Actuators shall be UL Standard 873 listed. The actuator shall be have electronic overload or
digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the entire rotation
of the actuator. Mechanical end switches or magnetic clutch protection shall not be acceptable.
All 24 VAV/VDC actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring, and shall not require more than 10
VA for AC, or more then 8 watts for DC applications. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit
fitting and a minimum 3 foot electrical cable, and shall be pre-wired. Actuators shall be designed
for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator’s rated torque, and shall have a 2 year
unconditional manufacturer’s warranty.
C. Proportional actuators shall provide a 2-10 VDC or 4-20mA operating range, and shall provide a
2-10 VDC position feedback signal. An actuator capable of accepting a pulse width modulating
control signal and providing full proportional operation of the damper is acceptable. All
modulating actuators shall have an external, built-in switch to allow the reversing of direction of
rotation.
D. Where noted on the drawings, provide damper operators to meet Class I Div II and Class II Div II
requirements.
E. Manufacturer: Johnson, Seimens, Belimo.
2.32 VALVE ACTUATORS:
A. General: Furnish valve actuators with adequate capacity to operate the valve smoothly through
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 16
the operating range. Provide oversized motors or operator if needed. Voltage ranges shall be
adjustable.
B. Valve actuators for control of hot water and chilled water shall be of the modulating type with a
range of at least 100 to 1. Valves actuator shall be electric with either proportional or incremental
control. Reference Section 230900 for description of control valve bodies.
2.33 PRESSURE SWITCH FOR DIRTY FILTER INDICATION:
A. .05 - 12" wg adjustable Dwyer 1630
B. Johnson P-32
2.34 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS:
A. General: Differential pressure sensors shall vary the output voltage with a change in differential
pressure. The sensor shall connect to the remote controller by means of a function module kit.
Use 0-3 WC for duct static and 0-.3" WC for building static. Sensor accuracy shall be plus or
minus 2% of the span. Reference sensor to outside for duct static control.
B. Sensor/Transmitter Air: Dwyer Series 600 with control point at 60 percent of scale range.
Furnish adjustment tool, mounting hardware, tubing adapters, sensing insertion tube. Provide
power supply. Mount unit in cabinet at mechanical room. Extend 3/8" minimum tubing to
sensing point (both duct and reference). Deliver 4-20 ma signal to receiver/controller.
C. Receiver Controller: Johnson Controls Series to accept and condition duct sensor/transmitter
signal for delivery to VFD. Install complete with VFD package. Independent systems for both
heating and cooling services.
2.35 HAND/AUTO SWITCHES, manual analog output devices (potentiometers), hand graduals, etc., as
needed.
2.36 TEMPERATURE SENSORS:
A. Furnish and install electronic room, duct and immersion temperature transmitters of the linear
precision resistance element of resistance averaging element. Their range shall be -55oF to 250oF
with an accuracy of plus or minus .25oF. Limited range sensors shall be acceptable provided they
are capable of sensing the range expected for the point at the specified accuracy.
B. Temperature sensors shall be of the thermistor (PTC) nickel wire, or silicon type with a high
resistance change versus temperature change to insure good resolution and accuracy. Sensors
shall be available for room, duct or wall mounting. Sensors shall connect to remote controller by
means of a two-wire unshielded cable. Room type sensors shall be available with built-in
setpoint potentiometer and programming jack. Sensors shall be available in various ranges to
properly suit the application.
1. Johnson Controls Inc. TE-6000 series (temperature sensor only), Johnson Controls Inc.
2. HE-6413 series (humidity/temperature).
C. Duct-mounted averaging type temperature sensor shall utilize a nickel resistance sensing element
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 17
incorporated in a copper capillary of 27 feet. The sensor shall vary the output voltage with a
change in temperature. Sensor shall connect to the remote controller by means of a three-wire
unshielded cable. Johnson Controls Inc. TE-6000 series.
D. Outdoor air sensor shall be of the PTC silicon, nickel or RTD type with a high resistance change
versus temperature change. Sensor shall be available for outdoor or duct mounting. Sensor shall
connect to remote controller by means of a two-wire unshielded cable. Shield outside air sensing
transmitter from the effects of sunlight.
E. Where transmitters are used for sensing liquid temperatures, furnish with brass separate wells.
2.37 AIR DUCT DETECTORS: Furnished, installed and wired by Division 26, Electrical Contractor.
2.38 LOW LIMIT THERMOSTATS:
A. Provide manual reset low limit thermostats in the leaving air of each coil that is subject to
freezing conditions and as specified elsewhere in these specifications. Thermostats shall have a
20 foot (minimum) element and shall respond to the coldest one foot section of that element.
Provide sufficient thermostats to adequately protect the entire coil face area (a minimum of one
for every 40 square feet of coil). Unless otherwise specified, activation of the low limit
thermostat shall stop the air handling unit, close the outside air damper.
2.39 NETWORK TERMINAL:
A. Furnish one (1) portable NCU Operator's Terminal to the Systems Operation Department.
B. Standalone NCU panel Portable Operator's Terminals: Each NCU panel shall be capable of
supporting an operator's terminal for local command entry, instantaneous and historical data
display, including 24 hour continuous Point History display of all points. Display shall be in
English language format, menu driven. Numerical coded or alpha-numeric coded operator's
access shall not be allowed.
1. The NCU panel Operator Terminal shall simultaneously display a minimum of 6 points
with full English identification to allow an operator to view single screen dynamic
displays depicting entire mechanical systems.
2. The operator functions provided by the NCU panel Operator Terminal shall include, but
not be limited to, the following:
a. View "Online Help" menu in English language to assist operator utilization.
b. Start and Stop Points
c. Modify Setpoints
d. Modify PID Loop Setpoints
e. Override PID Control
f. Change Time/Date
g. Add/Modify Start/Stop Weekly Scheduling
h. Add/Modify Setpoint Weekly Scheduling
i. Enter Temporary Override Schedules
j. Define Holiday Schedules
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 18
k. View Analog Limits
l. Enter/Modify Analog Warning Limits
m. Enter/Modify Analog Alarm Limits
n. Enter/Modify Analog Differentials
o. View Point History Files
p. 5 Levels of Password Access
3. The NCU panel Operator Terminal shall provide access to all real or calculated points in
the controller to which it is connected, or any other controller in the network. This
capability shall not be restricted to a subset of predefined "global points", but shall
provide totally open exchange of all data between the operator terminal and any NCU
panel in the network.
4. Operator password access at all NCU panel Operator Terminals shall be identical to each
other, as well as identical to the PC or Laptop Operator Workstations. Any password
changes shall automatically be downloaded to all controllers on the network.
5. The NCU panel operator terminal shall provide English language prompting to eliminate
the need for the user to remember command formats or point names. Prompting shall be
provided consistent with a user's password clearance and the types of points being
displayed, to eliminate the possibility of operator error.
6. A multi-function touchpad shall be provided for point and command selection, as well as
parameter entry. To minimize the possibility of operator error, the NCU panel Operator
Terminal shall change and limit touchpad functions based upon an operator's password
clearance, the function being performed, and types of points being displayed. Screen
displays shall clearly indicate only valid touchpad functions.
7. Context-Sensitive Help: On-line, interactive user's "Help" manuals and tutorials shall be
provided. Based upon operator request, the "help" function shall provide general system
operating instructions, and specific descriptions of commands available in the currently
displayed menus.
8. Identification for all real or calculated points shall be consistent for all network devices.
The same English language names used at PC workstations shall be used to access points
at the NCU panel Operator's Terminal to eliminate cross-reference or look-up tables.
9. In addition to instantaneous summaries, the NCU panel Operator's Terminal shall allow a
user to view a Point History file for system points. Point History files shall provide a
record of value of analog points over the last 24 hours, at 30-minute intervals, or a record
of the last ten status changes for binary type points.
2.40 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD): The VFD's shall be furnished and installed as specified.
A. The DDC controller shall furnish required 4-20ma control signal to modulate the VFD.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMPLETE SYSTEM:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 19
A. Integrate into all new controls into the existing Johnson Controls System. Provide all controls
and related functions, with all power and communications wiring, with sensors, room thermostats,
actuators, valves, dampers, etc.
B. Note that the terminal box controller is to provide a "pressure independent" function for any
terminal box provided for this project.
C. Participate in the checkout and commissioning and shake out of all of the mechanical systems.
Provide complete and detailed checkout and testing of all controls and control sequences.
Provide thermal rise trend recording and logs during system testing and shake out, which
includes, but is not necessarily limited to thermal trend for; sequence during simulated campus
CHW failure operation, and sequence during simulated chiller failure and operation sequence
before thermal load and with thermal load.
D. Contractor shall coordinate with BYU personnel to get Ethernet jacks installed. For
communication from front-end server to the jack panels in the field.
3.2 CONTROL SEQUENCES:
A. The sequences of control for the DDC system shall be equivalent to those specified for the base
bid system with the added benefits of programmable algorithmic control.
B. Fully describe the sequences in the submittals.
C. Fully document all work by shop drawing and product bulletin submittal, work from reviewed
drawings, maintain record documents during installation, provide a complete "As-Built"
document set in Autocad 2005 at completion.
3.3 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE:
A. GENERAL: The system installation shall be complete and tested for proper operation prior to
acceptance testing for the Owner's authorized representative. A letter shall be submitted to the
Architect requesting system acceptance. This letter shall certify all controls are installed and the
software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. Acceptance
testing will commence at a mutually agreeable time within ten (10) calendar days of request.
When the field test procedures have been demonstrated to the Owner's representative, the system
will be accepted. The warranty period will start at this time.
B. FIELD EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURES: All new DDC controls panels shall be
demonstrated via a functional end to end test. Such that:
1. All output channels shall be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and their
operations verified.
2. All analog input channels shall be verified for proper operation.
3. All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the field device and
observing the appropriate change of displaying value.
4. If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest failed point and
all interlocked points.
5. Automatic control operation shall be verified by introducing an error into the system and
observing the proper corrective system response.
6. Selected time and setpoint schedules shall be verified by changing the schedule and
observing the correct response on the controlled outputs.
C. WORKSTATION TEST PROCEDURES: The system workstation test procedures shall be as
follows:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DIRECT CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 20
1. Communication with each new DDC control panel shall be demonstrated.
2. Operator commands will be explained and demonstrated.
3. Control sequences shall be demonstrated for proper operation.
4. All available system reports and logs shall be demonstrated at the system workstation.
5. Correct system start-up and shutdown procedures shall be demonstrated.
6. All controllers shall be demonstrated to operate in a standalone mode.
D. AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION: See Section 230900.
E. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: See Section 230900.
END OF SECTION 23 0923
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0933- 1
SECTION 23 0933 - ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: See Section 230900.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Electric control functions and systems indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
B. Complete interrelationships with automation systems and mechanical equipment.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: See Section 230900.
1.4 SUBMITTALS: See Section 23 09 00.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: See Section 230900.
1.6 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: See Section 230900.
1.7 WARRANTIES: See Section 230900.
1.8 CLEANING AND LUBRICATION: See Section 230900.
1.9 TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM: See Section 230900.
PART 2 - MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.1 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY:
A. Obtain power from Division 26 distribution panel. Furnish appropriate circuit breakers
and extend conduit and wiring assigned to this division.
B. Furnish and install UL listed voltage reducing transformers required for this work. Size
transformers to see no more than 70 percent of rated capacity at full load. Use industrial
quality "machine tool" grade transformers.
C. Make all electrical installations in conformance with the National Electrical Code
(current edition) and in accordance with Division 26.
D. Use same product lines for similar devices as used by electrician to result in a coherent
project.
E. Control Wiring:
1. In concealed locations above lay-in ceilings low voltage conductor may be
installed without conduit. Low voltage conductor shall be UL listed Article 725
Plenum Cable. Install the cable parallel to building walls.
2. In all other building areas, ie., electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, high
temperature water rooms, above “hard” ceilings, within walls, etc., all control
wiring shall be installed in conduit per National Electric Code. Installation shall
be square with the walls of the buildings.
3. Number and code all wiring.
F. Use no wire smaller than 16 gauge, no conduit smaller than 1/2".
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0933- 2
2.3 DAMPER POSITION RHEOSTATS:
A. Wall-mounted, line voltage, adjustable dial with 0-100% damper position range.
B. Honeywell or prior approved equal.
2.4 SMOKE DETECTORS: For installation in all fan systems above 2,000 cfm, systems 15,000 cfm
and larger require two such, one in return, one in supply air, furnished by Division 260000 and
installed by this Division. Power and fire alarm wiring by Division 260000, control circuit alarm
contact by this Division.
2.5 FREEZESTATS:
Manual reset, non-averaging, extended capillary tubes. Honeywell
L-480G, Johnson A11A-I/A70HA-1. Penetrate plenum wall with grommet protection, support
capillary on 1/4" copper tubing. Use DPDT action as needed or auxiliary relays with powered
circuits.
2.6 FIRESTATS, HI-LIMIT THERMOSTAT:
Manual reset, break on rise for protection, make on rise for alarm with relay needed to make on
rise.
Honeywell L-4029E.
Johnson A25AN-1
2.7 AUXILIARY RELAYS:
Light Duty - Honeywell R4222/R8222.
Heavy Duty - Square D, Class 8501, Type X.
T-E, S & S.
2.7 TIME DELAY RELAYS:
A. Aquastat Series 7000 with appropriate action.
2.8 ELECTRIC DAMPER ACTUATORS FOR EXHAUST FANS OR VENTILATION FANS:
A. General Actuators: 120 VAC, 2-position control. Size motor to damper for non-overloading
characteristics. Fit with adjustable position and switches to limit stroke. Two-position actuators
shall not require more than 10 VA.
B. Manufacturer: Johnson, Siemens, Belimo.
END OF SECTION 23 0933
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 1
SECTION 23 2000 - GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. This section is Division 232113 General Pipes and Fittings section, and is part of each
Division 23 section making reference to pipes and pipe fittings specified herein.
C. Division 230000 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This section is generic in that it describes material and installation required by several
other sections of this specification.
B. Types of pipes and pipe fittings specified in this section include the following:
1. Steel Piping
2. Copper Piping
3. Cast-Iron Pressure Piping
4. Cast-Iron Soil Piping
5. Grooved Joint Piping
6. Miscellaneous Piping Materials/Products.
C. Pipes and pipe fittings furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as
part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of pipes and pipe
fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications:
1. Firm with at least three years history of successful experience on projects of
similar nature.
2. Licensed as a firm in the contractor state of origin and in the State of Utah.
3. Have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this
work and all other work in progress by the contractor.
4. All workmen employed on the project to carry state licenses as journeyman or
apprentice pipe fitters with additional certification for welders.
C. Welding Certification:
1. Each welder shall have passed a qualification test within the past six months
prior to working on the project.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 2
2. The test shall be in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section
IX, "Welding Qualifications", ASME Section VIII, and ANSI 313.
3. The test report shall certify that the welder is qualified to weld the material to be used at
the job site in the positions required (flat, verticle, overhead etc).
4. Submit three copies of each welder's qualification test report to the Project Manager for
approval prior to commencing the work. No welder shall be used on the project until so
certified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions, and
dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe and pipe fitting. Submit piping schedule showing
manufacturer, pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for each piping system.
B. Welding Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work.
C. Brazing Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of mechanical fitting.
Include this data, product data, and certifications in maintenance manual; in accordance with
requirements of General Conditions.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes And Standards:
1. Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME
B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work.
2. Brazing: Certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, for shop and job-site brazing of piping
work.
3. NSF Labels: Where plastic piping is indicated to transport potable water, provide pipes
and pipe fittings bearing approval label by National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Store pipe in a manner to prevent sagging and bending.
B. Store pipe in a manner to prevent dirt and debris from entering piping. When possible store steel
and copper pipes and tubing inside and protected from weather. Whether stored inside or outside
elevate above grade and enclose with durable waterproof wrapping. Raise slightly one end of
sealed piping to prevent accumulations of condensate and pitting where condensate accumulates.
C. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by
packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL:
A. Piping Materials: Provide pipe and tube of type, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall
thickness or Class) indicated for each service. Where type, grade or class is not
indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer for installation
requirements, and comply with governing regulations and industry standards. Use United
States (domestic) manufactured pipe only. Do not use foreign made pipe.
B. Pipe/Tube Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class and
pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching
pipe, tube, valve or equipment connection in each case. Where not otherwise indicated,
comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and with pipe
manufacturer's recommendations where applicable. Use domestic manufactured fittings
only. Do not use foreign manufactured fittings.
2.2 STEEL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:
A. Black Steel Pipe: Seamless or ERW, ASTM A 53.
B. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53.
C. Galvanized Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53.
D. Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135.
E. Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 671, A 672, or A 691.
F. Cast-Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.1, including bolting.
G. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4.
H. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated.
I. Unions: ANSI B16.39; 300 lb. ground joint malleable iron, hexagonal, selected by
Installer for proper piping fabrication and service requirements, including style, end
connections, and metal-to-metal seats (iron, bronze or brass); plain or galvanized as
indicated.
J. Dielectric Unions: 175 psig WSP at 250
oF. Equal to Clear Flow Dielectric Waterway
Fittings. Install per manufacturers requirements.
K. Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14.
L. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following
material group, end connection and facing, except as otherwise indicated.
1. Material Group: Group 1.1.
2. End Connections: Buttwelding.
3. Facings: Raised-face.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 4
4. Steel Pipe Flanges For Waterworks Service: AWWA C207.
M. Forged-Steel and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, except MSS SP-79 for threaded
reducer inserts; rated to match schedule of connected pipe.
N. Forged Branch-Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
O. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use
less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2", and
where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close-
nipples).
2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS:
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88; Type K, L (wall thickness) as indicated for each service;
hard-drawn temper, except as otherwise indicated. Do not use Type M piping.
B. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B 306.
C. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B 280.
D. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.18.
E. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22.
F. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23.
G. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29.
H. Cast-Copper Flared Tube Fittings: ANSI B16.26.
I. Bronze Pipe Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.24.
J. Copper-Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use
in service indicated.
2.4 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:
A. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: FS WW-P-401.
B. Cast-Iron Hub-and-Spigot Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74.
C. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: Neoprene gasket complying with ASTM C 564 and
stainless steel clamp holding band.
D. Cast-Iron Hub-and-Spigot Soil Pipe Fittings: Match soil pipe units; complying with same
standards (ASTM A 74).
E. Compression Gaskets: ASTM C 564.
2.5 PLASTIC PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS:
A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC): ASTM D 1785. Schedule 80. Plenum Rated.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 5
B. PVC Fittings:
1. Schedule 80 Socket: ASTM D 2467.
2. Schedule 80 Threaded: ASTM D 2464.
2.6 GROOVED PIPING PRODUCTS: (Only where acceptable.)
A. General: At Installer's option, mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings may be
used for piping systems having operating conditions not exceeding 230oF (110oC),
excluding steam piping, condensing water return to pump, and any other service not
recommended by manufacturer, in lieu of welded, flanged, or threaded methods, and
may also be used as unions, seismic joints, flexible connections, expansion joints,
expansion compensators, or vibration reducers.
B. Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or
shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create
seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts.
Permit degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest
published literature. (Victaulic style 77) For rigid joints (Victaulic "Zero Flex" style 07).
1. Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47.
2. Coupling Housings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536.
3. Standard: Enamel coated, options hot dip galvanized.
C. Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal
pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties
as designated by ASTM D 2000.
1. Water Services: EPDM Grade E, with green color code identification.
2. Other Services: As recommended by Manufacturer.
D. Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 110,000 psi.
1. Exposed Locations: Tamper resistant nuts.
E. Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging
machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside
diameter around hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during
assembly with nuts and bolts.
F. Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings.
1. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47.
2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
3. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A 53, Type F for 3/4" to 1-1/2"; Type E or S, Grade B
for 2" to 20".
4. Steel: ASTM A 234.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 6
G. Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment.
1. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47.
2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
H. Specialties:
1. Dielectric couplings. Victaulic Style 47.
I. Grooves: Conform to the following:
1. Standard Steel: Roll grooved.
2. Ductile Iron: Radius cut grooved, AWWA C606.
J. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping
products of one of the following:
1. ITT Grinnell Corp.
2. Victaulic Co. of America.
3. Gustin-Bacon
4. Anvil Gruvlok
K. Coordination with Section 23 07 00: Insulation of coupled piping is more difficult and
expensive than is that of welded piping related to couplings, coupling ears, and more
involved support. Where coupled piping is used, include all extra cost in the proposal.
Install such at no additional cost to the owner.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS:
A. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
1. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for
welding materials.
B. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Use no lead bearing
solders in domestic water applications.
1. Tin-Antimony Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA.
2. Silver-Lead Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 96TS.
C. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
1. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for
brazing filler metal materials.
D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for
steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non-Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or
elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 7
exact fit to pipe ends and subject to approval by plumbing code.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping
connectors of the following:
a. Fernco, Inc.
F. Strainers:
1. Y pattern, self cleaning, line size. Armstrong, Bailey, Crane, Fisher, Metraflex,
Mueller, Sarco, Strong, or Yarway.
a. Iron Body, Screwed Ends 2" and Smaller: 250 psig at 425
oF, screen
mesh to suit service.
b. Flanged Iron Body 21/2" and Larger: 125 psig steam pressure rating,
screen mesh to suit service.
2. Basket pattern, Mueller #155 to 30 psi, with quick release flanged lid Mueller
#165 to 175 psi, with bolt on flanged lid.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices
which will achieve permanently- leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each
indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and
couplings, but with adequate and accessible union, flanges, etc., for disassembly and
maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by
use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16"
misalignment tolerance. Do not cold spring. Store filler weld materials in accordance
with codes.
1. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.
B. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to
drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with
walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and
notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not
obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold
piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other clearance to 1/2" where
furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation
thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside
insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from
view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended
ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated. Provide
high point vents, low point drains with valves and extension to drain for all piping.
C. All piping in mechanical rooms, fan rooms, etc., shall be exposed. Do not conceal or
imbed piping in walls, floors or other structures.
D. Make changes in direction or size with manufactured fittings. Anchor and support piping
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 8
for free expansion and movement without damage to piping, equipment or to building.
E. Arrange piping to maintain head room and keep passageways clear.
F. Provide unions at connections to equipment and elsewhere as required to facilitate
maintenance.
G. Run full pipe size through shutoff valves, gas cocks, balancing valves, etc. Change pipe
size within three pipe size diameters of final connection to equipment, coils, etc.
H. Erect all piping to insure proper draining. Domestic water, chilled water, and heating
water shall slope down a minimum of 1" per 40 feet towards the drains. Pitch standpipes
down to fire department connections a minimum of 1" per 40 feet. Slope soil, waste,
vent, and roof drain lines in accordance with requirements of Uniform Plumbing Code.
I. On horizontal straight runs of pipe, use eccentric reducers with straight side on top for
water piping.
J. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping in or through transformer vaults and
other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures or above electrical gear
unless authorized and directed. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through
electrical spaces.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS:
A. General: Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system.
B. Threaded: Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using
sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply
pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting
manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3
threads exposed.
C. Brazed: Braze copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with ASME
B31.
D. Soldered: Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with
recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and
clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both
tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will
draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint
before it hardens.
E. Welded:
1. Weld pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.
2. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows:
a. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0
oF (-18oC)
where possible, with minimum pipe preheat to 50oF.
b. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5
o angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and
clean to remove slag, metal particles and dirt.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 9
c. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1" long welds; 4 welds for pipe
sizes to 10", 8 welds for pipe sizes 12" to 20".
d. Build up welds with stringer-bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed
by cover or filler pass. Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each
weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound or
unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes and non-metallic
inclusions.
e. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding
procedures; refabricate to comply with requirements.
f. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever
branch pipe is indicated; or install regular "T" fitting.
g. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever
branch pipe of size smaller than main pipe is indicated; or install regular
"T" fitting.
F. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and
equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform
compression of gaskets.
G. Hubless Cast-Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's installation instructions.
H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves
in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING:
A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and
prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out piping systems with clean
water before proceeding with required tests. Flushing shall consist of not less than six (6)
short intermittent flushes of five (5) to ten (10) minutes duration. Sample and test each
flush for cleanliness. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports
and accessory items.
1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31.
B. Disinfect water mains and water service piping in accordance with AWWA C601.
C. Clean, flush as above and treat heating and cooling systems in accordance with Sections
chemical treatment. Certify by signature of Contractor and Owner's Representative.
3.4 PIPING TESTS:
A. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test
piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove control
devices before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but
do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve
pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and
time.
1. Required test period is 2 hours.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 10
2. Test long runs of Schedule 40 pipe at 150 psi, except where fittings are lower
Class or pressure rating.
3. Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less
than 25 psi test pressure.
4. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage
is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.
B. Notifications: At least 10 days prior to commencement of required testing, notice shall
be submitted for review. Tests shall be made prior to painting insulating or covering of
any joints and shall be in accordance with ANSI Code for Pressure Piping.
C. Inspections: Contractor to visually inspect piping while under hydrostatic pressure.
Copies of inspection shall be submitted for review. At option of contract, welds not
hydrostatically tested may be x-ray tested.
D. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and
re-installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use
chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.
E. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.
F. Test pressure piping in accordance with ANSI B31.
G. Test waste, drain and vent systems in accordance with local plumbing code and these
specifications. Repair failed sections by disassembly and reinstallation.
H. If test procedures in other sections differ from the above, comply with more stringent
requirements.
END OF SECTION 23 2000
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113 - 1
SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. All pertinent sections of Division 23 “General Mechanical Requirements” are a part of
the work described in this section.
B. All pertinent sections of Division 23 “General Pipes and Fittings” are a part of the work
described in this section.
C. Other Specification sections related to Insulation, System Commissioning, Testing and
Balancing.
1.2 SUMMARY: Work shown on the drawings and required by these specifications including
incidental work classified as "best practices of the trade".
A. Glycol heating water systems.
B. Glycol chilled water systems.
C. Other work as indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of hydronic
piping products and equipment of types, materials and sizes required, whose products
have been in service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications:
1. Firm with at least 3 years history of successful experience on projects of similar
nature.
2. Licensed as a firm in the Contractor state of origin and in the State of Utah.
3. Have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this
work and all other work in progress by the Contractor.
4. All workmen employed on the project shall carry state licenses as journeyman or
apprentice pipe fitters with additional certification for welders.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical literature indicating source, brand, type,
model, performance characteristics, installation instructions, etc.
B. Record Drawings: See Division 23.
C. Operation And Maintenance Information: Provide information for all equipment
including a comprehensive system operating description. See Section 019113.
D. Instruction Of Owner's Personnel: Participate in specified instruction. See Division 23.
1. As part of the overall project warranty, furnish individual manufacturer
warranties for each piece of equipment for a period of not less than one year from
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113 - 2
date of Owner's beneficial use (substantial completion).
2. Warrant the overall assembly of equipment, materials and labor comprising these
systems.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Standards: Comply with applicable sections, follow recommended practices.
1. State Boiler and Pressure Vessel Regulations
2. ASME Codes for Boilers and Pressure Vessels
3. State and Local Plumbing and Mechanical Codes
4. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code / International
Plumbing Code
5. ASHRAE Handbooks
PART 2 - MATERIALS AND METHODS – GLYCOL HEATING WATER, GLYCOL SNOW MELT
HEATING WATER, GLYCOL CHILLED WATER, GLYCOL HEAT RECOVERY WATER:
2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS:
A. Schedule 40 black steel, A-53 with malleable steel threaded fittings up to 2" size and
forged steel welding fittings 2-1/2" and larger. Contractor option to use a grooved joint
system accommodating for additional support and insulation work. Grooved joint system
shall only be used in exposed areas such as mechanical rooms and fan rooms. All piping
in shafts and above ceilings shall be either screwed, flanged, or welded.
1. Rigid type “K” or “L” copper, bronze or dielectric interface.
B. Optional for chilled water over the Gym only. HVAC Water Pipe – PP-R: (Not Approved
for Glycol Heating Water System)
1. Pipe Sizes 8” and smaller: Pipe shall be manufactured from a PP-R resin meeting
the short-term properties and long-term strength requirements of ASTM F 2389.
The pipe shall contain no rework or recycled materials except that generated in
the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same
raw material. All pipe shall be made in a three layer extrusion process. Piping
shall contain a fiber layer (faser) to restrict thermal expansion. All pipe shall
comply with the rated pressure requirements of ASTM F 2389 and be not less
than 340 psi at 55°F and 100 psi at 180°F. All pipe shall be certified by NSF
International as complying with NSF 14, NSF 61, and ASTM F 2389 or CSA
B137.11. Pipe shall be Aquatherm® Greenpipe®, or Greenpipe® Faser®,
available from Aquatherm, Inc.
2. Any piping installed in a return air plenum and shall be Aquatherm® Advanced
meeting flame and smoke rating of 25 and 50 respectively. Wrap pipe will
insulate with metallic wrap, and seal all joints.
C. Drains And Overflow: Install piping of any size from drains and overflows using type K
or L copper piping with Solder joint type wrought copper of wrought bronze fittings.
Drains and over flows shall be terminated over floor drains or drain funnels adjacent to
JOHN W. HART BUILDING AUXILIARY GYM REMODEL 95 Percent Construction Documents
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113 - 3
equipment. Furnish drains from all pump bases to floor drains.
D. Water Connections: Provide piping and fittings connecting to the domestic water system,
such as fill lines, makeup water lines, etc., of Type K or L copper tubing with solder joint
type wrought copper or wrought bronze fittings. Copper piping shall be connected to
equipment and steel piping with insulated unions to prevent electrolysis.
2.2 GENERAL SERVICE VALVES: Comply with Section "Valves".
A. General: Provide valves complying with Division 23 General Mechanical Materials and
Methods section "Valves", in accordance with the following listing.
1. Sectional Valves:
a. 2 ½" and Smaller: Ball valves.
b. 3" and Larger: Butterfly valves.
2. Shutoff Valves:
a. 2 ½" and Smaller: Ball valves.
b. 3" and Larger: Butterfly valves.
3. Drain Valves:
a. 2 ½" and Smaller: Ball valves.
4. Check Valves:
a. All Sizes: Swing check valves where space permits, else use wafer type.
b. Pump Discharge: Non-slam, pump discharge check.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND SPECIALTIES: See Section "Valves".
2.4 CIRCUIT BALANCE VALVES:
A. Circuit balance valve for flow balance complying with Section “Valves”.
2.5 VENT VALVES:
A. Manual Vent Valves: Provide manual vent valves designed to be operated manually.
Use ball valve.
B. Automatic Vent Valves: Provide automatic vent valves designed to vent automatically
with float principle, stainless steel float and mechanisms, cast-iron body, pressure rated
for 125 psi, 1/2" NPS inlet and outlet connections.
C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering vent valves which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Armstrong Machine Works.
2. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
3. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
4. Spirax Sarco.
5. Amtrol.
JOHN W. HART BUILDING AUXILIARY GYM REMODEL 95 Percent Construction Documents
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113 - 4
2.6 STRAINERS:
A. General: Y pattern, self cleaning, line size.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide strainers
of one of the following:
1. Armstrong
2. Watts
3. Moesco
4. Metraflex
5. Spirax Sarco
6. Mueller
C. 2” and Smaller for Copper Pipe: Watts 777 Series, cast bronze body, wye-pattern, 400
psig WSP at 210ºF, 20 mesh 304SS screen, US manufactured threaded connections.
(Addendum #3)
D. 2" and Smaller for Steel Pipe: Watts No. 77S or equal in Armstrong, 250 lb. iron body,
threaded, Y-pattern, 20-mesh stainless steel screen, full size drain connection with ball
valve.
E. 2-1/2" and Larger: Watts No. 77F-125 or equal in Armstrong, 125 lb. iron body, flanged,
Y-Pattern, stainless steel screen, drain connection with ball valve.
F. Basket Type: (for condenser) 150 psig WWP, iron body, flanged ends, stainless steel
basket with 1/8" perforations with bolted/gasketed cover. Bottom tapped drain
connection selection based on Muesco number 165.
2.14 CHILLED WATER METER:
A. Equipment: Provide turbine type meter constructed to comply with all performance and
material standards of AWWA C701, 175 psi working pressure. Bronze housing with
flanged connections with sealed register reading gallons sized for 200 gpm flow rate at
maximum of 5 psi pressure drop with accuracy of 100% ± 1% of flow. Provide with
remote reading type head compatible with Power Logic CM4000.
B. Approved Manufacturer:
1. Sensus – Omni T2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which hydronic piping systems materials
and products are to be installed.
3.2 GENERAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION:
A. Arrange system in a neat, orderly and functional manner. Maintain access around all
JOHN W. HART BUILDING AUXILIARY GYM REMODEL 95 Percent Construction Documents
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113 - 5
equipment. Provide sheeves for all structural penetrations.
B. Plan ahead for seismic restraint and vibration isolation.
C. Verify adequate ventilation for heat producing equipment, watch out for possible freezing
conditions.
D. Air Vents and Line Drains: Provide air vents at all high points of piping systems with
vent line extended to valve installed in accessible location 5'-0" above the floor, vent line
extended to drain. Provide drain valves at all equipment and at low points in the system,
extend drain lines to drain funnel or floor sink.
E. Provide pressure gauges and thermometers and pressure/temperature plugs as indicated
on the flow diagrams, piping plans and equipment details.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC PIPING:
A. General: Install hydronic piping in accordance with Division 23 “General Pipes and
Fittings."
B. Install eccentric reducers where pipe is reduced in size in direction of flow, with tops of
both pipes and reducer flush.
C. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation
and servicing of valves.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES:
A. Install piping specialties in accordance with Division 23 "Hydronic Piping and
Specialties."
3.5 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS:
A. Install supports and anchors in accordance with Division 23 "Mechanical Supporting
Devices."
3.6 INSTALLATION OF VALVES:
A. Install valves in accordance with Division 23 "Valves."
B. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser
serves 2 or more hydronic terminals or equipment connections, and elsewhere as
indicated.
C. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item, and on
inlet of each hydronic terminal, and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Hydronic Terminal Outlet Valves: Install on inlet of each hydronic terminal, and
elsewhere as indicated.
E. Drain Valves: Install on each mechanical equipment item located to completely drain
equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop
in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain hydronic
piping system.
JOHN W. HART BUILDING AUXILIARY GYM REMODEL 95 Percent Construction Documents
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113 - 6
F. Check Valves: Install on discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as indicated.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION COMPENSATION PRODUCTS:
A. General: Provide for expansion and contraction of all piping systems with anchors,
guides, loops, expansion joints, grooved joints, etc. Provide one expansion loop for every
100 feet of pipe or fraction thereof.
3.8 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
A. General: Connect hydronic piping systems to mechanical equipment as indicated, and
comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated.
Install shutoff valve and union on supply and return, drain valve on drain connection.
B. Hydronic Terminals: Install hydronic terminals with hydronic terminal shut-off valve
and union on outlet; union, shutoff valve on inlet. Install manual air vent valve on
element in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Locate valves and balancing
valves behind valve access doors for ease of maintenance. Where indicated, install
automatic temperature control valve with unions on supply line.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES:
A. Balance Valves: At locations shown on drawings.
B. Vent Valves:
1. Manual Vent Valves: Install manual vent valves on each hydronic terminal at
highest point, and on each hydronic piping drop in direction of flow for mains,
branches, and runouts, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Automatic Vent Valves: Install automatic vent valves at top of each hydronic
riser and elsewhere as indicated. Install shutoff valve between riser and vent
valve, pipe outlet to suitable plumbing drain, or as indicated.
3.10 TESTS:
A. Isolate sections of piping and equipment and pressure test to 175 psi or 1-1/2 times the
maximum potential pressure of the system, but not to exceed the test pressure rating of a
system component.
1. Conduct an air pressure test, using a soap solution to check for leaks. Establish
the pressure, close off the pressure source and let stand for 24 hours. Given
constant temperature, there should be no drop in pressure.
2. After the air test, fill the system with water, raise to test pressure and inspect for
leaks. Repair all leaks. Repeat tests. Report and certify all tests.
B. Test other system components as needed to verify proper assembly and installation.
C. Participate in overall system test and balance work.
END OF SECTION 23 2113
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT 23 2500 - 1
SECTION 23 2500 - CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT FILTERS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Types of chemical treatment specified in this section include the following:
1. Glycol Heating Water System.
2. Campus Glycol Chilled Water System.
3. Cleaning and Treatment.
4. Steam System Chemical Treatment.
5. Domestic Water System Disinfection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLYCOL SYSTEM: Provide and install glycol and glycol make-up unit for each of the glycol heating
water system, glycol chilled water system and glycol snowmelt system complete with the following:
Note: Contractor shall provide and install all glycol make-up units.
A. Glycol:
1. 35% glycol by volume for portion of heating water system related to this project.
Inhibited propylene glycol as manufactured by Dow Chemical Dowfrost HD or Union
Carbide.
2. 35% glycol by volume for portion of campus chilled water system related to this project.
Inhibited propylene glycol as manufactured by Dow Chemical Dowfrost HD or Union
Carbide.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GLYCOL HEATING WATER, CAMPUS GLYCOL CHILLED WATER, AND TREATMENT:
A. Provide valved bypass lines as needed to allow recirculation. Provide valve connections needed
to fill, vent and drain system.
B. Flush and clean new and existing systems.
C. Provide valved bypass lines as needed to allow recirculation. Provide valve connections needed
to fill, vent and drain system.
1. Use a treatment schedule similar to the following, but to be verified compatible with
system materials.
2. Fill, circulate, drain system, clean strainers. Use clean water.
3. Fill, introduce sodium triphosphate or suitable degreaser, take the water to operating
temperature, circulate for minimum of 5 hours, drain, flush.
4. Fill the heating water, and campus chilled water as noted below:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT 23 2500 - 2
a. Fill heating water systems with new 35% inhibited propylene glycol, Dowfrost
HD.
b. Fill chilled water systems including existing piping with 35% inhibited propylene
glycol, Dowfrost HD. May re-use existing glycol, add additional glycol as
necessary.
3.2 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM: Refer to Division 22 “Water Distribution Piping and Equipment” for
cleaning and disinfection.
END OF SECTION 23 2500
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 1
SECTION 23 3100 - DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of this
section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements
of this section.
B. Types of ductwork required for the project include the following:
1. Round
2. Rectangular
3. Oval
4. Spiral
5. Underground
6. Factory
C. Exterior Insulation of metal ductwork is specified in other Division-23 sections, and is
included as work of this section.
D. Refer to other Division-23 sections for exterior insulation of metal ductwork; not work of
this section.
E. Refer to other Division-23 sections for ductwork accessories; not work of this section.
F. Refer to other Division-23 sections for fans and air handling units; not work of this
section.
G. Refer to other Division-23 sections for mechanical controls; not work of this section.
H. Refer to other Division-23 sections for louvers; not work of this section.
I. Refer to other Division-23 sections for filters; not work of this section.
J. Refer to other Division-23 sections for air control boxes; not work of this section.
K. Refer to other Division-23 sections for grilles and diffusers; not work of this section.
L. Refer to other Division-23 sections for system commissioning, testing and balancing; not
work of this section.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 2
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal
ductwork products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation
experience on projects with metal ductwork systems work similar to that required for
project.
1. The installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient
amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the Contractor.
2. All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or
apprentice sheet metal workers with additional certification for welders.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions
for metal ductwork materials and products.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of metal ductwork and fittings
including, but not limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal
runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spacial
relationship between ductwork and proximate equipment. Show modifications of
indicated requirements, made to conform to local shop practice, and how those
modifications ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not reduced.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed metal
ductwork and ductwork products, in accordance with requirements of General
Conditions.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork materials
and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal
ductwork.
2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume,
Chapter 1 "Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal
ductwork.
3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of
Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 3
Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems".
4. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code: Comply with all
sections pertaining to mechanical work.
B. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and
purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end
damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where
necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK - GENERAL:
A. Standards: All duct fabrications shall comply with standards and techniques detailed by
SMACNA "Duct Construction Manuals" for the appropriate pressure class, and with the
ASHRAE Handbook, 1988 edition, Chapter 1, Duct Construction
B. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet
steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with G 90 zinc coating in
accordance with ASTM A 525; mill phosphatized for exposed locations.
C. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in
occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections,
including those which would impair painting. Installation of exposed ductwork shall be
laid out in advance and submitted for review. Ductwork shall be hung straight and
uniform, points shall be true, seams shall show continuity.
D. Stainless Steel Assemblies: Fabricate of Type 304 SS or Type 316 SS stainless steel
sheet complying with ASTM A-167 with all welded joints and seams. Provide polished
No. 4 satin finish for all hoods and duct exposed to view, No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect
finished surfaces with mill applied adhesive protective paper through fabrication and
installation.
2.2 FITTINGS AND FABRICATION:
A. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15
o
change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45o lateral
and 45o elbows for branch take-off connections. Where 90o branches are indicated,
provide conical type tees.
B. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as
applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line
radius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 4
where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30o for contracting tapers and
20o for expanding tapers.
C. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent
possible. Refer to Division-23 section "Duct Accessories' for accessory requirements.
D. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated. Laminate
liner to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of
lining and adhesive, and fasten with mechanical fasteners.
E. Offset, transition, adapt ductwork to structural obstacles and work of other trades in a
coordinated effort. Layout work to avoid conflict with piping, etc. With review of
conditions, teardrop around conflicting piping, lights, etc., all at no added cost to the
owner.
2.3 DUCT PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS:
A. For all VAV systems, which include but are not limited to
1. From fan discharge to air terminal unit: medium pressure ductwork, 10" w.g.
2. From fan discharge to low pressure systems 3” wg.
3. Rectangular supply air ductwork from air terminal unit, rectangular and round
ductwork: Low pressure rectangular ductwork, 3" w.g. Low pressure round
ductwork exposed to view spiral backseam, 3" w.g.
4. Branch round supply air ductwork runout from rectangular ductwork to diffuser:
Low pressure round ductwork, 1" w.g.
5. Outside air ductwork and plenums, 10" w.g.
6. Relief air plenums, 3" w.g.
B. Low pressure exhaust ductwork and ventilation systems, which include but are not
necessarily limited to exhaust fan systems and ventilation systems.
1. Low pressure rectangular ductwork, 3" w.g. Increase metal gauge by 2 (i.e., 20
to 18) for all sizes.
2.4 LOW PRESSURE ROUND DUCTWORK: (1" SMACNA Pressure Class)
A. Round type ductwork for use on low velocity supply systems (1200 fpm maximum), low
pressure (0.75" maximum duct pressure), shall be fabricated on 26 gauge galvanized
steel sheets with snap-lock longitudinal seams and crimped and beaded joins.
B. All end joints shall have at least three screw fasteners and shall be wrapped airtight.
Transverse and longitudinal seams shall be taped with "Hardcast TA". Elbows and
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 5
fittings shall provide smooth air flow patterns and have a neat appearance.
C. Use factory fabricated elbows of the multi-sectional adjustable type.
D. Use aluminum duct in swimming pool spaces and systems.
2.5 LOW PRESSURE RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK: (3" SMACNA Pressure Class)
A. Rectangular ductwork for use on supply systems up to 2" maximum duct static pressure
and 2000 fpm maximum duct velocity shall be constructed of galvanized steel using
construction for nominal 3" SMACNA rated systems. Seal all transverse joints with duct
cement or tape with "Hardcast TA".
B. Use radius elbows or turning vanes with extended trailing edge. Use a true 1-1/2 time
45o tapping takeoffs with downstream balance damper.
C. Duct dimensions are inside clear. Increase for acoustical lining.
D. For rectangular exhaust ducts, increase metal gauge by 2 (i.e. 20 to 18) for all sizes. Seal
all joints.
E. Use aluminum duct in swimming pool spaces and systems.
2.6 MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK: (10" SMACNA Pressure Class)
A. General: At Installer's option, provide factory-fabricated duct and fittings, in lieu of
shop-fabricated duct and fittings.
B. Round Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527 by
the following methods and in minimum gauges listed.
Method of
Diameter Minimum Gauge Manufacture
3" to 14" 26 Spiral Lockseam
15" to 26" 24 Spiral Lockseam
27" to 36" 22 Spiral Lockseam
37" to 50" 20 Spiral Lockseam
51" to 60" 18 Spiral Lockseam
Over 60" 16 Longitudinal Seam
60" to 84" 18 Spiral Lockseam
Provide locked seams for spiral duct; fusion-welded butt seam for longitudinal seam
duct.
C. Round Duct Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide
continuous welds along seams. Mitered elbows shall be of at least 5 piece construction
with R/D ratio of 1.5. All branch takeoffs shall be a true 45º takeoff having an overall
throat width at the main duct connection of 1-1/2 times the sizes of the branch duct.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 6
Diameter Minimum Gauge
3" to 36" 20
38" to 50" 18
Over 50" 16
D. Flat-Oval Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527,
of spiral lockseam or longitudinal seam construction, in minimum gauges listed.
Maximum Minimum
Width Gauge Spiral Longitudinal
Under 25" 24 22
25" to 48" 22 20
49" to 70" 20 18
Stiffener Inserts 4'-0" on Center
E. Flat-Oval Duct Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide
continuous weld along seams.
Maximum
Width Minimum Gauge
Under 37" 20
37" to 50" 18
Over 50" 16
F. Double wall Internally Insulated Duct and Fittings: Construct with outer pressure shell,
1" or 2" thick (as indicated on drawings) insulation layer, and perforated inner liner.
Construct shell and liner of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, of
spiral lockseam construction, use longitudinal seam for over 59", in minimum gauges
listed. Use where indicated on drawings.
Equivalent to United McGill "Acoustic-K27".
Nominal Duct
Diameter Outer Shell Inner Liner
3" to 12" 26 gauge 24 gauge
13" to 24" 24 gauge 24 gauge
25" to 34" 22 gauge 24 gauge
35" to 48" 20 gauge 24 gauge
49" to 58" 18 gauge 24 gauge
Over 59" 16 gauge 20 gauge
G. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide continuous weld
along seams of outer shell. Construct fittings to close tolerance with ductwork.
Nominal Duct
Diameter Outer Shell Inner Liner
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 7
3" to 34" 20 gauge 20 gauge
36" to 48" 18 gauge 20 gauge
Over 48" 16 gauge 20 gauge
H. Field joints shall be made up using an initial coat of 3M EC-750 adhesive wrapping the
joint with a 3" wide fiberglass strip and applying a final seal coat of adhesive to the
fiberglass. Duct sections and fittings shall be held in place at joints with sheet metal
screws 6" on centers. Simple coating of joint surfaces with mastic prior to joining is not
acceptable (SMACNA Std. P.1-11).
As an alternative method of duct joint sealing, the joints shall be held in place with
screws as specified, but the contractor may use "Thermofit" duct sealing bands as
manufactured by Rayclad Tubes of Menlo Park, California. Bands shall be installed
according to the manufacturer's directions. The open flame shall not be used in the
vicinity of combustible materials.
I. Oval ductwork shall be installed where called for on the plans and where required to
conform to tight space requirements encountered during construction. The contractor
shall furnish transition pieces as required. Oval ductwork shall have equivalent capacity
to the round duct.
At the Contractor's option odd inch diameter round ducts may be increased in size to the
next larger even inch providing space considerations are accommodated and all related
conditions are resolved by the contractor.
2.7 FACTORY DUCT:
A. Extent of Work: Provide factory duct at connections to air terminal units, at runouts to
grilles and diffusers, at points of round to round flexible connections (see also "Flexible
Connections") and at other locations indicated or required.
B. Prohibited Material: Do not use single wire helix ducting with vinyl or plastic liner of
any type.
C. Factory Duct Non-corrosive Environments: Woven fiberglass fabric impregnated with
vinyl or neoprene clamped in a continual helix of aluminum or cold rolled steel. U.L.
listed for Class 1 duct, compliant with NFPA 90A and 90B, pressure rated to 12" w.g.,
equivalent to:
D. Non-insulated: Wiremold 57; Flexmaster Type N145
E. Insulated: Flexmaster Type 4; Thermaflex M-KC
F. Installation: Follow manufacturers instructions. Use stainless steel or nylon band
clamping rings. In general, do not use lengths in excess of 3 feet. Make bends only in
long radius format. Support duct to avoid droops and kinks.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 8
A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and,
where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork
system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.
B. Runout Fittings: Runout fittings shall be used to make round to rectangular duct
connections. Use 45o time and a half square to round fittings. Provide with locking
quadrant dampers where balance is involved. Provide with insulation guard where
insulated duct is involved.
C. Duct Sealing Compound: Duct sealing compound shall be 3M brand number EC-750 or
Duro-Dyne S-2. This material shall be used in making up duct joints or in water
proofing, caulking plenums, etc.
D. Acoustical Lining: Acoustical lining in ducts shall be 1" thick, 1-1/2 pound density,
coated, flexible glass fiber type, set in adhesive and impaled on weld studs spaced not
more than 12" on centers and secured with lock washers. Airstream surface faced with
black coated matte. Acoustical lining shall completely line the ducts. Lining shall have
a fire and smoke hazard rating not exceeding 20-50-50. Owens-Corning, Johns-
Manville, Certainteed.
E. All joints, edges and/or surface breaks in the coating of the acoustical lining shall be
pointed up to a smooth surface with adhesive.
F. Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 "Specifications for Adhesives and
Duct Thermal Insulation".
G. Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards,
Article S2.11.
H. Duct Cement: Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement (type
applicable for fabrication/ installation detail) as compounded and recommended by
manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in
ductwork.
I. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped
galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.
2.9 AUXILIARY DRAIN PANS:
A. Extent of Work: Where a equipment cooling coil or duct mounted coil providing a
cooling function is mounted in a ceiling plenum or other furred space, or under the
emergency generator ventilation duct, provide a secondary drain. This may be an
overflow drain connection or a corrosion resistant, water-tight drain pan either with drain
line extended to a point of visible discharge. (Reference UMC Section 310, 1994 ed.)
B. Construct drain pan of 304 stainless steel with overlapped and soldered corners, with 1"
Type M copper tube drain line. Provide long radius bends with cleanout plugs at each
change in direction. Provide cleanouts every 20 feet or less with “wye” pattern fittings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 9
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK:
A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry
practices which will achieve air tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for
systems rated over 3") and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of
performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints.
Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with
internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and
anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support
vertical ducts at every floor.
All necessary allowance and provisions shall be made in the installation of sheet metal
ducts for the structural conditions of the building, and ducts shall be transformed or
divided as may be required. Whenever this is necessary, the required area shall be
maintained. All of these changes, however, must be approved and installed as directed at
project. During the installation, the open ends of ducts shall be protected to prevent
debris and dirt from entering.
B. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-
fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements.
C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and
horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by
diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest
route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its
equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other
structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where
furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation
thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of
insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from
view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended
ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown.
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
D. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run ductwork through transformer vaults and other
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. Maintain clearances above of and in front of
electrical panels.
E. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are
exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation
with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least
1-1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 10
1. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide
firestopping between duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of
Section "Firestopping".
F. Ducts At Structural and Architectural Penetrations: Where ducts are shown connecting
to or passing through concrete, gypsum board, masonry openings and along edges of all
plenums at floors and walls, provide a continuous 2" x 2-1/8" galvanized angle iron
which shall be bolted to the construction and made airtight to the same by applying
caulking compound. Sheet metal in these locations shall be bolted to the angle iron.
Round high velocity ducts in vertical chases shall be supported with rolled angle rings.
Close openings between duct and structure.
G. Cross Breaking: Rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be cross broken on the four sides of
each 4-foot panel. All vertical and horizontal sheet metal barriers, duct offsets, elbows,
as well as 4-foot panels of straight sections of ducts shall be cross broken. Cross
breaking shall be applied to the sheet metal between the standing seams or reinforcing
angles; the center of cross break shall be of the required height to assure surfaces being
rigid.
H. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers,
coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.
I. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards.
1. Related to final installation cleanliness, damp wipe all ductwork on installation.
Cap open duct ends, cover fan inlets, vacuum fan plenums and related
installation before starting fans. Run fans only with filters in place.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER:
A. General: Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards.
As indicated on the drawings, supply, return and exhaust air ductwork shall be lined with
acoustical insulation.
In all cases outside air ductwork shall be lined with 2' thick 1-1/2 lb. density acoustical
lining unless indicated differently on drawings, ie. requiring Type 2 plenum.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS:
A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 3'-0"
extended length. No elbows allowed.
B. Installation: Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".
3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 11
A. It is essential that all ducts shall be rigidly supported. Hangers for low velocity ducts up
to 18" in width shall be placed on not more than 10' centers.
Low velocity ducts 19" through 35" in width and greater shall be supported on
not more than 5' centers. Where vertical ducts pass through floors or roofs,
heavy supporting angles shall be attached to ducts, and to structure. Angles shall
be of sufficient size to support the ductwork rigidly and shall be placed on at
least two sides of the duct.
B. Construct hangers for rectangular ductwork from galvanized iron l" x 1/16". Hangers
shall extend down the sides of rectangular ducts the full depth of the duct and shall be
bent underneath the duct 2". Hangers shall be secured to the duct using sheet metal
screws or rivets of appropriate sizes on 6" centers, but not less than two screws in the
side and one in the bottom of each hanger.
C. For rectangular ducts 36" and greater in width construct hangers from galvanized iron
1-1/2" x 1/16". Hangers shall be installed and secured to duct as described in Paragraph
B.
3.6 SUPPORTING DAMPERS: Parallel and opposed blade motor operated dampers shall be
supported by reinforcing the ductwork or sheet metal walls at the damper locations to carry the
weight of the dampers and the force exerted on the dampers due to air pressure, or shall be
supported independent of ductwork from the ceiling or floor, as conditions at the site determine.
3.7 CONNECTIONS: Connections of high velocity supply and exhaust ducts, fittings, and high
velocity mixing boxes shall be made airtight by coating joints with Minnesota Mining Co.
Mastic, Type EC-800, Benjamin Foster, Sheet Metal Products Co., or approved equal, before
joining, and then sealing the joint with one layer of "Glass-Fab" reinforcing tape set in a coating
of the above compound. Tape and sealant shall not exceed a flame spread of 25 or a smoke
development of 50.
3.8 WELDED JOINTS: Welded ductwork shall have either an angle or a piece of 1/8" steel bar
behind each weld to allow laying of a neat and continuous bead.
3.9 AESTHETIC LAYOUTS: Contractor shall locate all diffusers, grilles and other exposed items
in such a manner as to fit symmetrically in any grid system or other aesthetic architectural or
lighting pattern. Refer to reflected ceiling plans and electrical lighting layouts for additional
information. Provide duct offsets or extensions as required to make a proper installation.
Close or cap all duct ends. Use auxiliary blower with air flow meter to establish a duct pressure
equivalent to the duct pressure class. Inspect all joints in duct system and seal all identifiable
leaks.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Leakage Tests: After each duct system which is constructed for duct classes over 3" is
completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage
Test Manual. Air leaks which are in excess of that required to bubble the soap suds (that
is, actually blow the suds away) shall be sealed by additional taping and caulking to
reduce the leakage to a rate not to exceed slow bubbles forming. Repair leaks and repeat
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 12
tests until total leakage conforms with Chart of Figure 4-1, Seal Class A, Leakage Class
3 for round/oval, 6 for rectangular.
3.11 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION:
A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection
for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or
equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated.
3.12 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Clean ductwork internally of dust and debris, as follows: Before the ceilings are
installed, with filters in place, operate the fans at full capacity to blow out dirt and debris
from ducts. If it is not practical to use the main supply blower for this test, the ducts may
be blown out in sections by a portable fan.
B. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration
of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint
deterioration.
C. Balancing:
1. Refer to Division-23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air
distribution balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this section. However, the
Sheet Metal Contractor shall participate fully in this work. Seal any leaks in
ductwork that become apparent in balancing process.
2. If specified conditions cannot be obtained due to deficiencies in equipment
performance or improper installation or workmanship, the Mechanical
Contractor and his subcontractors shall make any changes necessary to obtain
the specified conditions.
END OF SECTION 23 3100
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 1
SECTION 23 3300 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by
requirements of this section.
B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following:
1. Dampers.
a. Low pressure manual dampers.
b. Control dampers.
2. Smoke dampers.
3. Fire Smoke dampers.
4. Turning vanes.
5. Duct hardware.
6. Duct access doors.
7. Flexible connections.
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork accessories;
not work of this section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories,
of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 3 years.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory,
including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of ductwork
accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or support, and
methods of assembly of components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of
duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in
accordance with requirements of General Conditions.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 2
1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".
2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction
of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.
3. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard
555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers".
4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated accessories and purchased products
from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and
moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
B. Storage: Where possible, store accessories inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to
store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL DAMPERS:
A. Control dampers are furnished by the Mechanical Control Section but installed by this Section.
Dampers shall be supported, plenum openings shall be reinforced, the entire assembly shall be
sturdy and operate smoothly. Install dampers to direct outside and return air into each other for
mixing
2.2 MANUAL BALANCE DAMPERS:
A. Manual balance dampers shall be constructed with 16 ga. galvanized steel structural hat channel
frames, 16 ga, galvanized steel blades, synthetic bearings and ½: square steel axles positively
locked to damper blades.
1. Honeywell D-643.
2. Johnson D-2300.
3. Ruskin CD-35
4. Pottorff
5. Nailor
6. American Warming,
7. NCA
8. Air Balance
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 3
2.3 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS:
A. Galvanized hat-shaped steel channel frame, steel airfoil shaped double skin construction blades,
silicone rubber blade edge seals, flexible compression jamb seals. Stainless steel bearings, usable
link UL 555S, leakage Class I. Furnish with factory installed damper operator (electric) to match
the smoke control system. Damper and operator are to be qualified for 350oF category. Ruskin
FSD 60 Class I. Damper and operator to be normally closed. Label (UL) all dampers. Use
Honeywell electric non-exercising type actuator, links shall be 165F for cold and return air,
212F for hot air. Furnish with momentary push to test switch for each damper, factory wired.
Provide Ruskin Inspector system or prior approved equal. FSD Manufacturers: Ruskin, Pottorf,
Nailor, Prefco, NCA.
B. Fire and Smoke Damper Testing and Maintenance System:
1. Provide and install for each fire smoke damper (FSD) in the Science and Technology
Building a testing and maintenance system as follows:
2. A complete fire and smoke damper testing and maintenance system shall be provided for
remote monitoring and exercise of all fire smoke dampers (FSD’s) in each building in
accordance with NFPA, International Fire Code, and State and City Fire Codes. Each
and every FSD or SD shall be connected with a twisted pair of plenum rated shielded
cable from damper controllers to a router. All components shall be fully integrated and
provide complete communication including graphics.
3. Each FSD shall have a dedicated controller with pre-wired terminal strip, test jumper,
power LED, run LED, transmit LED, receive LED, 120 volt fire alarm power connection,
serial port, monitored inputs for damper open and damper closed end switches, output
testing relays, all either mounted on the FSD or SD at the factory or installed at the
factory in a wall mounted UL and NEMA 1 enclosure.
4. All FSD’s shall communicate through a twisted pair of shielded plenum rated cable to a
router. Each router shall be fully addressable from onsite or off site locations through an
ethernet port and have a communication LED, run/stop LED, error LED, and power
on/off LED. Provide with 120 volt power connection, 120/24 volt transformer, 1 megabit
memory, 2 megabit non-volatile battery backed RAM, 7 year lithium battery with 10,000
hour data retention. All mounted in a UL and NEMA 1 rated wall mounted enclosure
with hinged lockable door.
5. Provide complete with control panel(s), fire smoke damper interface at digital
input/digital output devices.
6. Provide a complete graphics and software package to allow for monitoring, testing,
observation, and logging of each individual FSD.
7. The entire system shall be UL 916, CSA and CE and UL 268A listed, designed for
operation between 0°F and 130°F and 10% to 90% relative humidity.
8. Provide a factory authorized and trained representative to install the software and graphic
program, and then startup, checkout and test and completely commission the system.
Train the owner’s operating personnel and leave the system in a fully operational and
validated condition.
9. Selection is based on Ruskin Inspector System.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 4
10. Refer to wiring diagram on drawings for additional components and wiring detail.
11. The router shall be located in the closet with the smoke exhaust control panel.
12. The computer is either existing or will be owner furnished and installed in room 360
Rigby Hall for the fire and safety system and in the HVAC shop control room for the
building management system.
2.4 TURNING VANES: Turning vanes shall be installed in all square elbows. Turning vanes shall be single
blade. Turning vane spacing shall be per SMACNA. Each blade shall be tack welded or crimped to the
carrier frame to prevent rattling.
2.5 DUCT HARDWARE:
A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for
the following:
1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct
test holes, cover, for instrument tests. Ventlok No. 699 closures shall be provided and
installed for each test hole, with sufficient neck length to penetrate the insulation.
2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and
end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant
locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork. (Bare duct -
Ventlok 620, 635; Insulated duct - Ventlok 627, 628, 637, 638, 629.)
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of the
following:
1. Ventfabrics, Inc.
2. Young Regulator Co.
2.6 DUCT ACCESS DOORS: Doors shall be 2" narrower than the duct width by 24" up to a maximum of
24" x 24". Duct access doors shall be furnished for all fire damper links, manual controllers and
adjustable balancing devices. Duct access doors for all ductwork (except low pressure ductwork) shall
be: Bolted access door, oval shaped constructed of an outer door connected to a an inner plate by spring
loaded carriage bolts with wing handles. Inner plate to have cellular spounge gasket for leak free
operation up to 20"wg. The door shall have permanently bonded polyester insulation.
2.7 WALL AND CEILING ACCESS DOORS: Wall and ceiling doors at fire dampers and smoke dampers
shall be the same as specified in Section 23 00 00. Doors shall be sized for easy access to fire links and
not less than 24" x 24" where possible.
2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:
A. Extent of Work: Provide flexible connections between ductwork or plenums and equipment,
such as at fan inlets and discharges, and at other places indicated on the drawings or called
for by note or specification.
B. Non-Corrosive Environment or Airstream: Provide material of heavy waterproof woven glass
fabric double coated with neoprene or hypalon equivalent to “Ventglas” for interior locations
and “Ventlon” for exterior locations, fabric not less than 3-1/4" wide clamped between strips
of 24 gauge galvanized iron. Material by Ventfabrics, Inc., Chicago, Ill.
C. Corrosive Environments or Airstream: Provide material of heavy waterproof woven
fiberglass fabric coated with Teflon equivalent to AVentel@ by Ventfabrics, Inc., Chicago, Ill.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 5
By nature, the material is slippery and requires rigid clamping in the field installation. Install
with the coated side to the corrosive air stream. Clamp the material into a stainless steel
edging or hinge with a folded fabric edge. Be careful in securing the clamped fabric to the
fan or duct as to not penetrate or disturb any protective coatings or surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES:
A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions,
with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and
in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended
function.
B. Install hand operated volume dampers at locations and of sizes shown. Volume dampers
shall be controlled by heavy duty locking quadrants mounted on the outside of the duct.
Where ducts are insulated, the damper rod shall be extended and the operator shall be
mounted on the outside of the insulation. Butterfly dampers may be constructed by the
Sheet Metal Contractor. All multi-blade hand dampers shall be the product of one of the
manufacturers listed in the Contract Documents. All operator fittings shall be heavy duty
commercial grade.
C. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in supply and exhaust air
systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either
side, except outside only where duct is to small for person to enter.
E. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of
ductwork accessories properly with other work.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as
required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire
dampers and adjust for proper action.
1. Label access doors in accordance with Division 23 section "Mechanical
Identification".
2. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 23 section "Testing,
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 6
Adjusting, and Balancing".
3. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched
surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.
3.5 EXTRA STOCK:
A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one link for every 10 installed of each temperature
range; obtain receipt.
END OF SECTION 23 3300
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3616 - 1
SECTION 23 3616 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of air terminals work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and
by requirements of this section.
B. Types of air terminals specified in this section include the following:
1. Air Control Valves
a. Single Duct VAV Cooling only.
b. Single Duct VAV Cooling with H.W. Heating.
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for external insulation of air terminals; not work of this
section.
D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for testing, adjusting and balancing of air terminals; not work
of this section.
E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for temperature controls for air terminals; not work of this
section.
F. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work; not work of this section.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on air terminals. Include
starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished,
or factory-installed, by manufacturer.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of air terminals with
characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on
projects with metal ductwork systems work similar to that required for project.
1. The Installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to
cover this work and all other work in progress by the contractor.
2. All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or apprentice sheet
metal workers with additional certification for welders.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3616 - 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including performance data for each
size and type of air terminal furnished; schedule showing drawing designation, room location,
number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished; and installation and start-up
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions,
weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder-type wiring diagrams for electric power and control
components, clearly indicating required field electrical connections.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of air terminal;
including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop drawings,
and maintenance data in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Section 23 05
93.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. ARI Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in accordance
with ARI 880 "Industry Standard for Air Terminals" and bear ARI certification seal.
2. NFPA Compliance: Construct air terminals using acoustical and thermal insulations
complying with NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
3. Uniform Building Code/Uniform Mechanical Code: Comply with all sections pertaining
to mechanical work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver air terminals wrapped in factory-fabricated fiberboard type containers. Identify on outside
of container type of air terminal and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and
prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in boxes.
B. Store air terminals in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic.
Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose
with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL:
A. Under the Base Bid which requests a Direct Digital Control System, a VAV box controller is
required which can provide a non-pneumatic, pressure independent, controls sequence.
1. Fit boxes with volume and temperature sensors and DDC controls, see Division 23
Controls.
2. Box capacity shall be equivalent to that scheduled.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3616 - 3
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air terminals of one of the
following:
1. Titus
2. Krueger
3. Price
2.3 SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE VOLUME COOLING ONLY:
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated and tested air terminal as indicated, selected with
performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on the schedule.
Vendor/Contractor to verify count and arrangement.
B. Construction: Factory fabricate VAV damper and coil into a single cabinet. Construct cabinet of
22 gauge or heavier galvanized steel with a 1" thick acoustical lining. Construct VAV damper of
air-tight, quarter turn design with shaft supported in sintered bronze or nylon bearings.
C. Controls: Reference Section 230923.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Titus
2. Krueger
3. Price
2.4 SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE VOLUME COOLING WITH HW HEATING (VAVR):
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated and tested air terminal as indicated, selected with
performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on the schedule.
Vendor/Contractor to verify count and arrangement.
B. Construction: Factory fabricate VAV damper and heating coil into a single cabinet. Cabinet
shall be of 22 gauge or heavier galvanized steel with a 1" thick acoustical lining. VAV damper
shall be of air-tight, quarter turn design with shaft supported in sintered bronze or nylon bearings.
Design with extension plenum, with access door ahead of coil for coil inspection and cleaning.
C. Controls: Reference Section 230923.
D. Heating Coils: Capacity and size as scheduled. Coils minimum 1 row, 10 FPI, with 2 row, 8 FPI
provided where capacity dictates.
1. Fins: Corrugated plate sheet aluminum, 0.01" sheet thickness minimum.
2. Tubes:
a. 1 Row Coils: Copper tube 1/2" diameter, 0.035” tube, 0.049” bend wall
thickness, expand tube into fins.
b. 2 Row Coils: Copper tube, 5/8" diameter, 0.035" tube, 0.049" bend wall
thickness, expand tube into fins.
3. Headers: Seamless Type K or L copper tube headers and return bends, brazed connections.
4. Casings: Construct of 16 gauge continuous coated galvanized steel with fins recessed into
channels to minimize air bypass.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3616 - 4
5. Testing: Air tested under water to 175 psig.
6. The successful supplier shall include as part of the submittal, computer generated capacity
data for each coil. Certify coil capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in
accordance with ARI 410.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Titus
2. Krueger
3. Price
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air terminals are to be installed. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF AIR TERMINALS:
A. General: Install air terminals as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
B. Location: Install each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other work;
and maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, but in no case less than
that recommended by manufacturer. Protect electrical clearances. Protect access to controls.
C. Duct Connections: Connect ductwork to air terminals in accordance with Division 23
ductwork sections.
D. Seismic Restraint: Provide 3-dimensional restraint for all suspended boxes.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that
air terminals, and duct connections to air terminals, are leak-tight.
B. Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and
retest to demonstrate compliance.
3.4 CLEANING:
A. Clean exposed factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturers touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION 23 3616
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3713 - 1
SECTION 23 3713 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by
requirements of this section.
B. Types of outlets and inlets required for project include the following:
1. Ceiling air diffusers and grilles.
2. Wall registers and grilles.
3. Louvers.
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ductwork and duct accessories required in
conjunction with air outlets and inlets; not work of this section.
D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for balancing of air outlets and inlets; not work of this
section.
E. Refer to other Division sections for louvers, not work of this section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and
inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation
experience on projects with metal ductwork systems work similar to that required for
project.
1. The Installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient
amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the Contractor.
2. All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or apprentice
sheet metal workers with additional certification for welders.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets
including the following:
1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location,
number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished;
indicating construction, finish, and mounting details.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3713 - 2
3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including
aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise
criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.
B. Samples: 3 samples of each type of finish furnished.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air
outlet and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for
finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in
maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650
"Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets".
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with
ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets
and Inlets".
3. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test
Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters".
4. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
5. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A
"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers.
Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid
crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.
B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction
work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store
above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air
diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of
materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and
velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed
in manufacturer's current data.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3713 - 3
C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with
adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module
with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and
specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air
diffuser.
D. Adjust all grilles and diffusers to fit neatly in the room ceiling pattern. Set final locations
per architectural reflected ceiling plans.
E. Volume Control Dampers: Provide duct mounted dampers of the externally adjustable
opposed blade type where more than one grille or register is on a common duct. Provide
access to each damper adjustment.
F. Fire Dampers: Install at the diffusers, registers and grilles as indicated on drawings or
required by code
G. Sound Level: The diffuser or grille generated noise shall not exceed the following sound
power level curve at a point five feet away form the diffuser or grille.
1. Commons Area: NC 35-40
2. Office Areas: NC 30-35
3. Storage: NC 35-40
4. Work Rooms: NC 35-40
H. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grilles and diffusers of
one of the following:
1. Krueger
2. Titus
3. EH Price
I. Types: Provide grilles and diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes
as listed on grille and diffuser schedule and as specified herein.
J. Grilles and Diffusers:
1. Ceiling Supply Diffuser (S-1): Krueger Series 1400, square face, round neck,
four-way deflection, anti-smudge design, removable inner core, all steel
construction, appropriate mounting frame, white baked enamel finish, size as
indicated on drawings.
2. Ceiling Supply Diffuser (S-2): Krueger Series SH, square face, one, two three or
four way blow as required. Square neck, opposed blade volume damper, anti-
smudge border, all steel, white baked on enamel, size as indicated on drawings.
3. Sidewall Supply Diffuser (S-3): Krueger Series DPL2, drum punkah louver,
aluminum construction, rotating drum with adjustable deflection vanes, rotating
drum permits 60° angular adjustment, heavy duty steel damper easily adjusted
through face, split vanes, clear anodized finish.
4. Slot Diffuser (S-4): Krueger Series 1900 ceiling slot diffuser, adjustable vanes
for varying volume and direction of throw. All aluminum construction 1” slots,
appropriate mounting frame, white baked enable finish, size as indicated on
drawings.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3713 - 4
5. Perforated Return Register (R-1): Krueger Series 6490. Perforated face,
concealed hinge frame, sponge rubber gasket, white baked-on enamel, size as
indicated on drawing.
6. Sidewall Heavy Duty Return/Exhaust Grille (R-2): Krueger Series S5480.
Heavy duty steel construction, appropriate mounted frame, 1/2” blade spacing,
blades on 35 deg. angle unless otherwise shown on drawings, sponge rubber
gasket, size as indicated on drawings. Color selected by Architects.
7. Eggcrate Exhaust Register (E-1, E-2): Krueger EGC-5. All aluminum
construction, ½" square core, appropriate mounting frame, surface or lay in as
shown on schedule, sponge rubber gaskets, white baked on enamel finish, 90%
minimum free area, size as shown on drawing.
8. Sidewall Return Register (T-1): Krueger Series S580H. Aluminum construction,
appropriate mounted frame, ¾” blade spacing, blades on 35 deg. angle unless
otherwise shown on drawings, sponge rubber gasket size as indicated drawings.
Color selected by Architect.
2.2 LOUVERS:
A. Extent of Work: At air openings in the outside wall where indicated on drawings, install
AMCA rated drainable stationary extruded aluminum 6" deep weather louvers.
B. Material: Blades shall be on 3-1/2" centers with integral downspouts to drain the water
from the louver blades. Stationary louvers shall pass 1000 fpm free area velocity with
less than 0.2" static pressure drop and shall carry less than .03 ounces of water per square
foot when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. Install stainless steel 1/2”
mesh screens on interior face and louver.
1. Louvers shall be equal to Ruskin ELF6375DX American Warming and
Ventilating LE-31, Louvers and Dampers, Ruskin, Greeheck. Coordinate with
the Architectural details for type of flange and structural details for actual wall
opening sizes. Anodized aluminum finish. Finish color and type selected by
Architect. Provide color samples for Architects review.
C. Contractor must coordinate louver size, flange type, and construction with structural and
architectural openings to assure fit and appearance. Louvers shall be one piece.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products
serve intended function.
B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to
interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3713 - 5
C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction
"Reflected Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical
ceiling module.
D. Air Mixer: Install in field assembled type II plenum, see section 233100. Provide
vertical and horizontal stiffeners, angles, etc. to create a rigid panel assembly. Install on
continuous 6”x6” concrete curb.
END OF SECTION 23 3713
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 1
SECTION 23 7300 - PACKAGED AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To
1. Furnish and install packaged modular air handling units as described in Contract
Documents.
B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section
1. Three way control valve
C. Related Sections
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, fan capacities, fan performance, motor
electrical characteristics, casing construction details, wiring interconnections, gauges,
and finishes of materials.
2. Indicate filter sizes and quantities, and filter frames.
3. Provide coil selection work sheets showing proper consideration for altitude, air
density, and fouling factor.
4. Manufacturer installation instructions.
5. Fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.
6. Sound power levels for air handling unit(s) at scheduled conditions.
7. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement,
spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.
B. Record Documents
1. Show unit configuration in direction of air flow.
2. Indicate assembly and unit dimensions.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certification Requirements
1. Certify air handling unit capacity, static pressure, fan speed, brake horse power, and
selection procedures in accordance with AMCA 210 and ASHRAE Standard 51
2. Certify air coils capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance
with ARI 410-87.
3. Certify sound power levels for air handling unit(s) at scheduled conditions.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver air handlers to site on factory-installed 5 or 6 inch high base rail.
1.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials - In addition to construction set, provide one additional set pleated media
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 2
filters for each air handler.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKAGED AIR HANDLING UNITS (ROOF MOUNTED UNITS AHU-300)
A. Provide each air handling unit with a factory installed airflow monitoring station. The
airflow monitoring station shall be either Ebtrum or Air Monitor-Electroflow.
B. Casing
1. Walls and roof 4” double wall construction.
a. Panels of standing seam construction with smooth flush exterior bolted
together. Sealed with continuous bead of silicone caulking applied between the
matching panel seams prior to assembly, and final bead following assembly on
both the interior and exterior panel seams.
b. Air handling unit’s walls, roof, base etc. shall be fully powdered coated. Gray
or White color.
c. Walls constructed of 4 inches thick double wall acoustical thermal panels.
d. Interior walls - Minimum 18 gage perforated or solid galvanized steel.
e. The entire unit housing shall have no visible deflection when exposed to a
differential pressure equal to 1.5 times the point of maximum pressure
differential in the unit housing. The casing shall be certified to have a leakage
rate of less than 1% of the rated air flow quantity at a maximum pressure equal
to 1.5 times the maximum differential pressure between the interior and exterior
of the unit housing.
2. Insulate sections handling conditioned air with 4 inches thick 3 lb / cu ft double
density matt faced fiberglass covered with inner panel of 18 gauge minimum
perforated galvanized steel. Install insulation using adhesive. Insulation edges shall
be protected with metal lagging.
3. For routine service access, supply unit with full height, galvanized, double wall,
thermally broken, hinged, access doors.
a. 16 gage steel exterior and 22 gage solid metal interior liner.
b. Continuously welded corners on doors.
c. Insulation as specified above.
d. Provide two heavy duty (Similar to Ventlock – 310) latches operable from
either side of door.
e. Doors shall be fully gasketed with continuous 1/2 inch closed cell hollow,
round, black gasket with metal encapsulated reinforced backing mechanically
fastened to door frame.
f. Door frames and jambs shall be extruded aluminum with continuously welded
corners.
g. Provide tool operated safety latch on all fan section access doors. Latch to
comply with Title 8 Cal-Osha, ETL and mechanical protection requirements of
UL 1995.
h. Provide doors with thermal pane wire glass viewing windows. Minimum
window size 9” x 9”.
4. Base shall be constructed from tubular structural steel 5 or 6 inch minimum around
perimeter of unit with intermediate tubular steel supports. Powder coated.
a. 16 gage plate shall be installed on base.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 3
b. Floor shall be flat, reinforced from below with seams continuously welded.
c. Provide base with lifting lugs.
d. Insulate base with four inch thick insulation 3 pound density insulation, sheeted
with 22 gage galvanized steel liner.
e. Provide auxiliary and condensate drain pans of 16 gauge 304 stainless steel
double bottom construction with welded corners. Manufacturer's standard
insulation sandwiched between pan layers.
f. Drain connections shall terminate at side of unit. Provide drain connections on
accessible side of the air handling unit.
C. Fans
1. Fan Array Units
a. The Multiple Fan Array shall consist of multiple direct-driven, non-overloading
plenum fans designed and constructed specifically for Multiple Fan Array
applications that are AMCA certified for performance. Maximum fan wheel
diameter shall be 22 inches. All fan wheels shall be minimum Class III
aluminum construction.
b. Fans: Selected to deliver design air flow at the specified operating Total Static
Pressure at the specified motor speed as scheduled in the Plans. The Multiple
Fan Array shall be selected to operate at a system Total Static Pressure that
does not exceed 90 percent of the specified fan’s peak static pressure
producing capability at the specified fan speed. Fans shall be AMCA 99-208
Class III construction.
c. Motors: Inverter-duty, Premium-efficiency TEFC or TEAO T-frame motors
selected at the voltage, frequency, and rpm as scheduled and shall meet the
requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 30 & 31, section 4.2. Motors shall be
manufactured by Baldor, Siemens or Toshiba. Motors shall be available in ½
HP increments as nameplate HP ratings from 1.5 HP through 12 HP. All motors
shall include permanently sealed bearings. Motor bearings shall be electrically
isolated from motor housing.
d. Each fan/motor assembly shall be dynamically balanced to meet AMCA
standard 204-96, for fan application class BV-5, to meet or exceed a rotational
imbalance Grade .55, producing a maximum rotational imbalance of .022” per
second peak, filter in (.55mm per second peak, filter in). “Filter in”
measurement
indicates that the specified balance grade must be achieved at the submitted
design operating speed for the fan(s). Fan and motor assemblies submitted for
approval incorporating larger that 215T frame shall be balanced in three
orthogonal planes to demonstrate compliance with the G.55 requirement with a
maximum rotational imbalance of .022” per second peak filter in (.55 mm per
second peak, filter in)
1) Vibration Measurements: Taken on each fan bearing in the horizontal,
vertical and axial directions. During balancing, the fan shall be imposed
with an operating resistance equal to the design external static pressure.
2) Certificate of Compliance: Provide a Certificate of Compliance signed
by
the manufacturer and incorporated into the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 4
e. Motor Bearings: Pre-lubricated and Sealed, Ball Bearings: Self-aligning,
pillow-
block type with a rated L-10 life of 200,000 hours according to ABMA 9.
f. Fan/motor assembly Access: Removable through the fan section access door
without disassembling the Fan/motor Assembly.
g. Multiple fan installations must have a minimum of scheduled number of fans.
The individual motor size shall not exceed 10.0 horsepower.
h. Backdraft Dampers: Each fan cell must be provided with an integral back flow
prevention device that prohibits recirculation of air in the event a fan, or
multiple
fans, become disabled. The system effect static pressure loss for the
submitted back flow prevention device shall be added to the scheduled TSP to
determine the revised fan TSP for fan selection purposes, and shall be
indicated as a separate line item SP loss in the submitted fan selection data. If
the new TSP value results in larger electrical requirements than scheduled, the
AHU manufacturer & its rep shall be responsible for any & all additional costs
associated with the increased electrical requirements.
i. Electrical Control Panel:
1) Each Fan/motor Assembly shall be individually wired to an Electrical
Control Panel that provides overload protection, short circuit protection
and a manual disconnect for each individual fan/motor assembly. Factory
wire each Fan/Motor Assembly to an individual Variable Frequency
Drive that is mounted directly at the individual fan cell or motor. Wire
all circuits to a common main panel terminal block for a single point
connection of power to the Air Handling Unit.
2) Code Compliance: Electrical designs, wiring and hardware in accordance
with the current NEC, UL 508C and local codes. Electrical Control Panel
shall be rated NEMA 1 Indoor.
3) Label and Listing: Control Panel shall be listed and labeled by UL, CSA
or ETL. Air Handling Units not listed and labeled at the factory shall be
inspected and labeled by a certified UL/CSA/ETL representative in the
field at the manufacturer’s expense.
4) Location: Mounted on the exterior of the air handler.
5) Auxiliary Contacts: Provide contacts for alarm connections to the
Building Management System.
6) Label and number code all wiring and electrical devices in accordance
with the unit electrical diagram.
7) Control and Lighting Power: Provide control and lighting transformers
wired to the common main panel terminal block for a single-point
electrical connection for the air handling unit.
8) Provide a PLC (programmable logic controller) with an operator
interface panel & display to allow control of the fan array VFDs from a
control input signal supplied by the BAS/ATC system based on control
of duct static pressure, air volume or building static pressure. The
operator interface panel & display shall be able to display each
individual fan cell’s operating conditions including air volume, TSP &
KW. If the fan array manufacturer or VFD manufacturer cannot provide
this controller, it could be provided, installed & fully commissioned by
the BAS/ATC contractor at the expense of the AHU manufacturer at no
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 5
additional cost to the owner form the original bid price for the project.
j. Manufacturers:
1) Huntair.
2) Temtrol
3) Governaire
D. Variable Frequency Drives
1. General Requirements: Provide VFDs factory mounted & wired at each individual
fan/motor cell.
a. As required by system design, provide one Variable Frequency Drive per motor
in the fan array to start, run and protect all motors in the fan array. Each VFD
shall be certified to be completely compatible with the motors. The Variable
Frequency Drives shall be sized based on the full load of the fan array motor. The
Variable Frequency Drive shall include an onboard pressure transducer for
monitoring airflow across the fans. Each VFD shall have an integrated disconnect
capable of lock-out/tag-out requirements.
b. The Variable Frequency Drive shall be plenum rated and mounted in the
airstream of each fan cube and located in the fan discharge section and factory
wired to a dedicated enclosure for connection to the single point power.
Dedicated electrical enclosure shall be provided single recessed touch screen
keypad for up to 32 Variable Frequency Drives for operation and programming.
Main disconnecting means is required and can be provided internally to the
dedicated electrical enclosure or separately for external mounting.
c. Provide three phase power distribution wiring and control wiring as required. All
three phase power components shall have a rating listed for Short Circuit Current
Rating. Provide control wiring and components required for complete operation
of the fan array system.
d. VFDs shall have the ability to quick connect through Ethernet cables in a daisy
chain configuration.
e. Each VFD shall be capable of auto-commissioning and transferring data to other
drives in the system through a copy/paste function.
f. Each VFD shall be capable of operating in an environment with up to 95%
Humidity-Condensing.
g. Each VFD shall come with Real-time Ripple Reduction, or R
3 Filtering for
harmonic reduction.
E. Coils
1. Provided by same company as supplier of air handling units and designed with
aluminum plate fins and copper tubes, with stainless steel casings.
2. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled, and firmly bonded to tubes with mechanical
expansion of tubes. Fins shall be minimum 0.01" sheet thickness.
a. Soldering or tinning shall not be used in bonding process.
b. Mount coils in unit casing to be accessible for service and can be removed from
unit through side or top.
c. Capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedure shall be certified in
accordance with ARI Standard 410.
3. Provide factory installed extended drain and vent connections for water coils. Provide
with factory installed intermediate 304 stainless steel drain pans between coil sections.
4. Water Cooling Coils -
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 6
a. Enclosed in insulated coil section.
b. Coil headers and U-bends shall not be exposed.
c. Water flow counter to air flow.
d. Proof tested to 300 psig and leak tested to 200 psig air pressure under water.
e. Round copper pipe headers.
f. 5/8 inch outside dimension tubes with minimum 0.035 inch wall thickness.
0.049" bend wall thickness.
g. Add ball type drain and vent valves to each header in field.
h. Coordinate coil connections with Drawings for access.
5. See Specification Section 238216.
F. Filters
1. Provide factory fabricated flat filter section of same construction and finish as unit
casing with filter guides and hinged, double wall access doors with automotive style
gasket for minimum leakage for filter removal.
2. See Specification Section 234116.
3. Filter Gauges -
a. Magnahelic gauges accurate to plus or minus 2 percent of full scale.
b. Provide probes and shut off valves with each gauge.
c. Pipe so gage can read drop across each filter bank.
d. Approved Manufacturer And Model - Series 2000 by Dywer
G. Dampers
1. Externally mounted outside air and return air.
a. Air foil design and aluminum construction.
b. Parallel blade type with metal compressible jamb seals and extrude vinyl blade
edge seals on all blades.
c. Blades shall rotate on stainless steel sleeve bearings.
d. 60 inch maximum bumper blade length.
e. Extend damper shafts minimum 6 inches outside of unit cabinet for mounting
of damper operators. Provide nylon bearings where shaft penetrates cabinet.
f. Maximum Leakage Rates -
1) 4 cfm/square foot at 4 inches Wg.
g. Approved Manufacturer And Model -
1) Ruskin - CD50
H. Main unit Electrical Panel and Wiring
1. The Air Handling Unit shall have an electrical control panel that shall include the
variable frequency drives with necessary fusing and or overload protection. The Air
handling unit shall be factory wired requiring only field wiring of main power to the
line side of the main power disconnect.
I. Lighting
1. Provide vapor proof service light fixture in each accessible section; wire to a common
switch located adjacent to a fan access door. Lights factory-wired to separate junction
box, to field connection of separate 120 volt circuit.
J. Sound Power Levels
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 7
1. The sound power level at the air handling unit discharge, air intake, return air and/or
OSA intake, and casing radiated not to exceed the values shown below, when the unit
is operating at maximum design airflow and static pressure. The sound power levels
are derived from data collected on representative fans shall be calculated in
accordance with AMCA Standard No. 300.
2. Maximum octave band sound power level, DB RE 10E-12 watts.
3. Provide sound power data for AHU’s
K. Approved Manufacturers and Suppliers
1. Huntair- Mechanical Products, Sandy, Utah (801-352-9003) attention Brent
Thomsen.
2. Temtrol
3. Governaire
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate draw-through type air handling units suitable for scheduled air pressure operation.
B. Fabricate units with supply fan sections, coil sections, and filter section.
C. Permanently join flanged panel surfaces and seal.
D. Turn wall and roof seams inward to provide clean, flush exterior finish.
E. Seal panel seams during assembly to produce airtight unit.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory fabricate and test air handling units of sizes, capacities, and configuration in
accordance with Contract Documents.
B. On units not shipped fully assembled, tag each section to indicate location in direction of
airflow to facilitate assembly at job site.
C. Base performance on altitude conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install vibration isolation pads under mounting rail at load points indicated by
unit manufacturer. Size shall be as recommended by unit manufacturer.
B. Level unit.
C. Provide each drain connection with deep seal trap and pipe all connections to drain.
D. Provide drain valve on each coil drain fitting and vent valve on each coil vent.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 8
E. Thoroughly seal and calk pipe and conduit penetrations to casing.
F. Seal floor penetrations.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Check and align access doors to ensure smooth operation.
B. At start-up, check each fan motor for rotation and amp draw for each phase. Mark reading
on fan scroll.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan
has been test run under observation.
END OF SECTION 23 7300
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3713 - 1
SECTION 238200 - TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-23 Motors Drives and Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Systems, General
Mechanical Requirements, and General Pipes and Fittings sections apply to work of this
section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Types of terminal units required for project include the following:
.
1. Cabinet heater, heating water.
2. Fan coil units.
B. Extent of work is indicated on drawings, schedules, and by requirements of this section.
C. Refer to other Division-23 sections for heating water, piping required in conjunction with
terminal heat transfer units.
D. Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on unit. Include
starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as
furnished, or factory-installed.
2. Interlock wiring between electrically-operated equipment units; and between
equipment and field-installed control devices shown on electrical drawings.
a. Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section.
E. Refer to other Division-23 sections for Automatic Temperature Controls
1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control
panels.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of terminal heat
transfer units with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been
in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on
projects with terminal heat transfer units similar to that required for project.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3713 - 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for heat transfer terminal units
showing dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance with operating point
clearly indicated, motor electrical characteristics, gages and finishes of materials, and
installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, required
clearances, construction details, and field connection details.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to
heat transfer terminal units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for
interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are
factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication,
filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data,
product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals; in accordance
with requirements of Division 230100.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate terminal heat transfer units in accordance with
AMCA standards.
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 -
"Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
3. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1,
Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
4. NFPA Compliance: Provide terminal heat transfer units internal insulation having flame spread rating not over 25 and smoke developed rating no higher than 50; and
complying with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
5. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable
to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of air handling units.
6. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code: Comply with all
sections pertaining to mechanical work.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver units in factory-fabricated protective containers.
B. Handle units carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. Do not install damaged components; replace and return damaged components to unit manufacturer.
C. Store units in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Where
necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3713 - 3
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINET HEATERS (Hot Water):
A. General: Provide cabinet heaters having cabinet sizes and in locations as indicated, and
of capacities, style, and having accessories as scheduled. Include in basic unit chassis,
coil, fanboard, fan wheels, housings, filter rails, motor, electric junction box and
insulation.
B. Chassis: Galvanized steel wrap-around structural frame with edges flanged.
Configuration as indicated on drawings.
C. Insulation: Faced, heavy density glass fiber.
D. Cabinet: 16-ga removable front panel. Insulate front panel over entire coil section.
Provide access door on coil connection side and for motor control. Clean cabinet parts,
bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer. Floor mounted, top
discharge with supply air grille, front bottom return air grille.
E. Water Coils: Construct of 5/8" seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to
configurated aluminum fins. Design for 200 psi and leak test at 300 psi under water.
Provide same end connections for supply and return. Each element shall have manual air
vent.
F. Fans: Provide centrifugal, forward curved double width fan wheels. Construct fan scrolls
of galvanized steel.
G. Motors: Provide shaded pole motors with integral thermal over-load protection, and
motor cords for plug-in to junction box in unit. Motors shall be permanently lubricated.
H. Motor Speed Control: Solid state, multi-speed with "off" position, unit mounted.
I. Filters: Provide 1" thick throwaway type filters in fiberboard frames.
J. Controls: Furnish unit with factory mounted fan speed switch and aquastat. Set up for
field mounting of control valve, isolation valves, balance valve, and DDC control.
K. Unit color to be as selected by Architect. Furnish paint samples for selection.
L. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cabinet heaters of one
of the following:
1. Trane (The) Co.
2. Airtherm Mfg. Co.
3. Daikin
4. Modine
5. Sterling
6. Rittling
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3713 - 4
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CABINET HEATERS:
A. General: Install units where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's
published installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that
units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work, piping, and electrical as necessary to interface
installation of other work.
C. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical
Installer.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's
submittal and installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with
equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.
D. Piping Connections: Refer to Division-23 HVAC sections. Provide piping, valves,
accessories, gages, supports, and flexible connectors as indicated. Install union
connection at piping connections.
E. Grounding: Provide positive equipment ground for unit components.
F. Set cabinet heaters level and plumb.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Testing: Upon completion of installation of terminal units, start-up and operate equipment to
demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Field correct malfunctioning
units, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
B. If specified conditions cannot be obtained due to deficiencies in equipment performance or
improper installation or workmanship, the Mechanical Contractor and his subcontractors
shall make any changes necessary to obtain the specified conditions.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces,
vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets.
B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish
materials furnished by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 238200
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 1
SECTION 26 0501
COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. General electrical system requirements and procedures.
2. Perform excavating and backfilling work required by work of this Division as described in
Contract Documents.
3. Make electrical connections to equipment provided under other Sections.
4. Furnish and install Penetration Firestop Systems at electrical system penetrations as described in
Contract Documents.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 07: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal
requirements.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Provide following information for each item of equipment:
a. Catalog Sheets.
b. Assembly details or dimension drawings.
c. Installation instructions.
d. Manufacturer's name and catalog number.
e. Name of local supplier.
2. Furnish such information for following equipment:
a. Section 26 2726: Wiring devices.
b. Section 26 5100: Interior lighting fixtures.
3. Do not purchase equipment before approval of product data.
4. Submit in three-ring binder with hard cover (six sets)
B. Quality Assurance / Control:
1. Report of site tests, before Substantial Completion.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. NEC and local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are
specified.
2. Material and equipment provided shall meet standards of NEMA or UL, or ULC, CSA, or
EEMAC and bear their label wherever standards have been established and label service is
available.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 2
B. Materials and equipment provided under following Sections shall be by same Manufacturer:
1. Sections 26 2416, 26 2816, and 26 2913: Panelboards, Enclosed Switches And Circuit
Breakers, and Enclosed Controllers.
C. Contractor shall obtain all permits and arrange all inspections required by local codes and ordinances
applicable to this Division.
1.4 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Provide competent instructor for time required to adequately train maintenance personnel in operation
and maintenance of electrical equipment and systems. Factory representatives shall assist this
instruction as necessary. Schedule instruction period at time of final inspection.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare and submit (4) four complete copies of the O & M Manuals—manuals to contain informa-
tion listed below. Place each manual in a tabbed three-ring binder upon completion of the project.
1. Operation and Maintenance manual must contain the following items:
a. Copies of reviewed shop drawings.
b. Letter of 1-year guarantee of workmanship.
c. Copy of voltage and ammeter readings.
d. Copy of letter verifying owner’s receipt of spare parts.
1.6 GUARANTEE
A. The following guarantee is a part of this specification and shall be binding on the part of the Con-
tractor:
“The Contractor guarantees that this installation is free from mechanical defects. He agrees to re-
place or repair, to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative, any part of this installation which may fail or be determined unacceptable within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance.”
1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. During the course of construction, the Electrical Contractor shall maintain a set of drawings upon
which all deviations from the original layout are recorded. These marked-up prints shall be turned
over to the Architect/Engineer at the conclusion of the work.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All such
work shall be included without additional cost to Owner.
B. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of equipment to be installed and coordinate these with
site dimensions and with other Sections.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Locations of electrical equipment shown on Drawings are approximate only. Field verify actual
locations for proper installation.
2. Coordinate electrical equipment locations and conduit runs with those providing equipment to
be served before installation or rough-in.
a. Notify Architect of conflicts before beginning work.
b. Coordinate locations of power and lighting outlets in mechanical rooms and other areas with
mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, cabinets, etc, so they will be readily accessible and
functional.
3. Work related to other trades which is required under this Division, such as cutting and patching,
trenching, and backfilling, shall be performed according to standards specified in applicable
Sections.
B. Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at electrical system penetrations
through walls, ceilings, and top plates of walls.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests: Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating properly. Notify
Architect before test. Rectify defects at no additional cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS 26 0502 - 1
SECTION 26 0502 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To
1. Demolition involving electrical system as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 26051 – Common Electrical Requirements
2. New and replacement work specified in appropriate specification Section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All
such work shall be included without additional cost to Owner.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect equipment that is to be removed or relocated. Carefully remove, disassemble, or
dismantle as required, and store in approved location on site, existing items to be reused in
completed work.
B. Where affected by demolition or new construction, relocate, extend, or repair raceways,
conductors, outlets, and apparatus to allow continued use of electrical system. Use methods
and materials as specified for new construction.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Perform drilling, cutting, block-offs, and demolition work required for removal of necessary
portions of electrical system. Do not cut joists, beams, girders, trusses, or columns without
prior written permission from Architect.
B. Remove concealed wiring abandoned due to demolition or new construction. Remove
circuits, conduits, and conductors that are not to be re-used back to next active fixture, device,
junction box or source.
C. Patch, repair, and finish surfaces affected by electrical demolition work, unless work is
specifically called for under other Sections of the specifications.
3.4 CLEANING
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS 26 0502 - 2
A. Remove obsolete raceways, conductors, apparatus, and lighting fixtures promptly from site
and dispose of legally.
END OF SECTION
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 26 0503 - 1
SECTION 26 0503 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections or funished by Owner.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. In the even of conflict regarding equipment wiring system requirements between this
Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
As described in the related sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical rough-in. Verify location,
size, and type of connections, voltage, number of phases, and ampacity. Coordinate details
of equipment connections with supplier and installer.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Use wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat-producing
equipment.
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible
conduit in damp or wet locations and for connections to vibrating equipment. Make
flexible connections to vibrating equipment of sufficient length to form a loop to restrict
transmission of noise to structural elements or to the air.
C. Install prefinished cord set or use attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps. Refer
to Section 26 2726, Wiring Devices, for details.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 26 0503 - 2
D. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of prewired equipment
in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide interconnecting wiring where
indicated. Tag all interconnecting wiring to identify source and destination equipment and
terminal numbers. Refer to Section 26 0553, Electrical Identification, for details.
END OF SECTION
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 0519 - 1
SECTION 26 0519
LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE
PART 1 -
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Quality of conductors used on Project except as excluded below.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Line Voltage: Over 70 Volts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Line Voltage Conductors:
1. Copper with AWG sizes as shown:
a. Minimum size shall be No. 12 except where specified otherwise.
b. Conductor size No. 8 and larger.
2. Insulation:
a. Standard Conductor Size No. 10 And Smaller: 600V type THWN or XHHW (75 deg C).
b. Standard Conductor Size No. 8 And Larger: 600V Type THW, THWN, or XHHW (75 deg
C).
c. Higher temperature insulation as required by NEC or local codes.
d. Type TC cable is acceptable for use in cable trays only.
3. Colors:
a. 208Y / 120 V System:
1) Black: Phase A.
2) Red: Phase B.
3) Blue: Phase C.
4) Green: Ground.
5) White: Neutral.
b. 480Y / 277 Volt System:
1) Brown: Phase A.
2) Orange: Phase B.
3) Yellow: Phase C.
4) Gray: Neutral.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 0519 - 2
5) Green: Ground.
c. Conductors size No. 10 and smaller shall be colored full length. Tagging or other methods
for coding of conductors size No. 10 and smaller not allowed.
d. For feeder conductors larger than No. 10 at pull boxes, gutters, and panels, use painted or
taped band or color tag color-coded as specified above.
B. Line Voltage Cables:
1. Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable (NM) and Metal Clad Cable (MC) may be used as restricted below.
a. Copper Conductors
b. Use only indoor, dry locations where:
1) Not subject to damage.
2) Not in contact with earth.
c. Not in concrete.
d. Is allowed by local codes.
C. Standard Connectors:
1. Conductors No. 8 And Smaller: Steel spring wire connectors.
2. Conductors Larger Than No. 8: Pressure type terminal lugs.
3. Connections Outside Building: Watertight steel spring wire connections with waterproof, non-
hardening sealant.
D. Terminal blocks for tapping conductors:
1. Terminals shall be suitable for use with 75 deg C copper conductors.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. 16323 by Cooper Bussmann, St Louis, MO www.bussmann.com
b. LBA363106 by Square D Co, Palatine, IL www.squared.com.
c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6000.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Conductors and cables shall be continuous from outlet to outlet.
2. Do not use direct burial cable.
B. Line Voltage Conductors (Over 70 Volts):
1. Install conductors in raceway except where specifically indicated otherwise. Run conductors of
different voltage systems in separate conduits.
2. Route circuits at own discretion, however, circuiting shall be as shown in Panel Schedules.
Group circuit homeruns to panels as shown on Drawings.
3. Neutrals:
a. On three-phase, 4-wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than three circuits.
b. On single-phase, 3-wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than two circuits.
c. Run separate neutrals for each circuit where specifically noted on Drawings.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 0519 - 3
d. Where common neutral is run for two or three home run circuits, connect phase conductors
to breakers in panel which are attached to separate phase legs so neutral conductors will
carry only unbalanced current. Neutral conductors shall be of same size as phase conductors
unless specifically noted otherwise.
4. Pulling Conductors:
a. Do not pull conductors into conduit until raceway system is complete and cabinets and outlet
boxes are free of foreign matter and moisture.
b. Do not use heavy mechanical means for pulling conductors.
c. Use only listed wire pulling lubricants.
END OF SECTION
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 1
SECTION 26 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install grounding for electrical installation as described in Contract Documents
except as excluded below.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 03 3111.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Size materials as shown on Drawings and in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Grounding And Bonding Jumper Conductors: Bare copper or with green insulation.
C. Make grounding conductor connections to ground rods and water pipes using approved bolted clamps
listed for such use.
D. Service Grounding Connections And Cable Splices:
1. Make by compression type connectors designed specifically for this purpose.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Burndy
b. Thomas & Betts.
c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work: Coordinate with Section 03 3111 in installing grounding conductor and
placing concrete. Do not allow placement of concrete before Architect's inspection of grounding
conductor installation.
B. Grounding conductors and bonding jumper conductors shall be continuous from terminal to terminal
without splice. Provide grounding for following.
1. Conduits and other conductor enclosures.
2. Neutral or identified conductor of interior wiring system.
3. Non-current-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment such as motors, starter and controller
cabinets, instrument cases, and lighting fixtures.
C. Pull grounding conductors in non-metallic raceways, in flexible steel conduit exceeding 72 inches in
length, and in flexible conduit connecting to mechanical equipment.
D. Connect equipment grounds to building system ground.
1. Use same size equipment grounding conductors as phase conductors up through #10 AWG.
2. Use NEC Table 250-95 for others unless noted otherwise in Drawings.
E. Run separate insulated grounding cable from each equipment cabinet to electrical panel. Do not use
intermediate connections or splices. Affix directly to cabinet.
F. Provide and install a #6 ground conductor from main service ground to telephone board. Terminate
ground at board on a grounding bar.
G. Provide a separate, insulated equipment green grounding conductor in all feeder and branch circuits.
Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing and to all metallic enclosures. A conduit
ground is not acceptable. Install grounding bushings on both ends of all feeder conduit and bond to
ground system.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: Notify Architect for inspection two days minimum before placing concrete over
grounding conductor.
END OF SECTION
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 1
SECTION 26 0533
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Quality of material and installation procedures for raceway, boxes, and fittings used on Project
but furnished under other Divisions.
2. Furnish and install raceway, conduit, and boxes used on Project not specified to be installed under
other Divisions.
3. Furnish and install main telephone service raceway as described in Contract Documents and to
comply with telephone company requirements.
4. Furnish and install main electrical service raceway to comply with electrical utility company
requirements.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 26 0501: General Electrical Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Raceway And Conduit:
1. Sizes:
a. 3/4 inch for exterior underground use.
b. 1/2 inch minimum elsewhere, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Types: Usage of each type is restricted as specified below by product.
a. Galvanized rigid steel or galvanized intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is allowed for use in
all areas. Where in contact with earth or concrete, wrap buried galvanized rigid steel and
galvanized IMC conduit and fittings completely with vinyl tape.
b. Galvanized Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Electrical Non-Metallic tubing (ENT)
1) Allowed for use only in indoor dry locations where it is:
a) Not subject to damage.
b) Not in contact with earth.
c) Not in concrete.
2) Flexible steel conduit or metal-clad cable required for final connections to indoor
mechanical equipment.
c. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit:
1) Allowed for use only underground or below concrete with galvanized rigid steel or IMC
elbows and risers.
d. Listed, Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit:
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 2
1) Use in outdoor final connections to mechanical equipment, length not to exceed 36
inches.
3. Prohibited Raceway Materials:
a. Aluminum conduit.
b. Armored cable type AC (BX) cable.
B. Raceway And Conduit Fittings:
1. Rigid Steel Conduit And IMC: Threaded and designed for conduit use.
2. EMT:
a. Compression type.
b. Steel set screw housing type.
3. PVC Conduit:
a. PVC type. Use PVC adapters at all boxes.
b. PVC components, (conduit, fittings, cement) shall be from same Manufacturer.
4. Flexible Steel Conduit: Screw-in type.
5. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Sealtite type.
6. Expansion fittings shall be equal to OZ Type AX sized to raceway and including bonding jumper.
7. Prohibited Fitting Materials:
a. Crimp-on, tap-on, indenter type fittings.
b. Cast set-screw fittings for EMT.
c. Spray (aerosol) PVC cement.
C. Outlet Boxes:
1. Outlet boxes shall be UL listed for the application, Heavy Duty PVC for NM and ENT of proper
size and shape are acceptable for all systems. Where metal boxes are used, provide following:
a. Provide metal supports and other accessories for installation of each box.
b. Equip ceiling and bracket fixture boxes with fixture studs where required.
c. Equip outlets in plastered, paneled, and furred finishes with plaster rings and extensions to
bring box flush with finish surface.
2. Telephone / data outlet boxes shall be a deep box to accommodate Cat 6A cables. 4sq. deep box
with single gang mudring where two or more cables come to one box.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Contact Information:
1. Cooper B-Line, Highland, IL www.bline.com.
2. Hubbell Incorporated, Milford, CT www.hubbell-wiring.com.
3. Square D, Palatine, IL www.squared.com.
4. Steel City, Div Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com.
5. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com.
6. Walker Systems Inc, Williamstown, www.wiremold.com.
7. Wiremold Co, West Hartford, CT www.wiremold.com.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of materials to be installed and coordinate these with
site dimensions and with other Sections.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work:
1. Coordinate with Divisions 22 and 23 for installation of raceway for control of plumbing and
HVAC equipment.
2. Before rough-in, verify locations of boxes with work of other trades to insure that they are
properly located for purpose intended.
a. Coordinate location of outlet for water cooler with Division 22.
b. Coordinate location of outlets adjacent to or in millwork with Division 06 before rough-in.
Refer conflicts to Architect and locate outlet under his direction.
3. Coordinate installation of floor boxes in carpeted areas with carpet installer to obtain carpet for
box doors.
4. Install pull wires in raceways installed under this Section where conductors or cables are to be
installed under other Divisions.
B. Conduit And Raceway:
1. Conceal raceways within ceilings, walls, and floors, except at Contractor's option, conduit may be
exposed on walls or ceilings of mechanical equipment areas and above acoustical panel
suspension ceiling systems. Install exposed raceway runs parallel to or at right angles to building
structure lines.
2. Keep raceway runs 6 inches minimum from hot water pipes.
3. Make no more than four quarter bends, 360 degrees total, in any conduit run between outlet and
outlet, fitting and fitting, or outlet and fitting.
a. Make bends and offsets so conduit is not injured and internal diameter of conduit is not
effectively reduced.
b. Radius of curve shall be at least minimum indicated by NEC.
4. Cut conduit smooth and square with run and ream to remove rough edges. Cap raceway ends
during construction. Clean or replace raceway in which water or foreign matter have
accumulated.
5. Install insulated bushings on each end of raceway 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger, and on all
raceways where low voltage cables emerge. Install expansion fittings where raceways cross
building expansion joints.
6. Run two spare conduits from each new panelboard to ceiling access area or other acceptable
accessible area and cap for future use.
7. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise. All roof
penetrations shall be flashed, counter flashed and sealed per Roofing Contractor. Coordinate all
roof penetrations with the Roofing Contractor.
8. Provide nylon pull string with printed footage indicators secured at each end of each empty
conduit, except sleeves and nipples. Identify with tags at each end the origin and destination of
each empty conduit, and indicate same on all empty or spare conduits on the as-built drawings.
9. Install expansion-deflection joints where conduit crosses building expansion, seismic, or
structural isolation break (SIB) joints.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 4
10. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, seal opening around conduit with UL-listed
foamed silicone elastomer compound. Fill void around perimeter of conduits with nonmetallic
nonshrink grount in all concrete or masonry walls.
11. Bend PVC conduit by hot box bender and, for PVC 2 inches in diameter and larger, expanding
plugs. Apply PVC adhesive only by brush.
12. Installation In Framing:
a. Do not bore holes in joists or beams outside center 1/3 of member depth or within 24 inches
of bearing points. Do not bore holes in vertical framing members outside center 1/3 of
member width.
b. Holes shall be one inch diameter maximum.
13. Underground Raceway And Conduit:
a. Bury underground raceway installed outside building 24 inches deep minimum.
b. Bury underground conduit in planting areas 18 inches deep minimum. It is permissible to
install conduit directly below concrete sidewalks, however, conduit must be buried 18 inches
deep at point of exit from planting areas.
14. Conduit And Raceway Support:
a. Securely support raceway with approved straps, clamps, or hangers, spaced as required.
b. Do not support from mechanical ducts or duct supports without Architect's written approval.
Securely mount raceway supports, boxes, and cabinets in an approved manner by:
1) Expansion shields in concrete or solid masonry.
2) Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units.
3) Wood screws on wood.
4) Metal screws on metal.
15. Prohibited Procedures:
a. Use of wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry units for mounting raceway, supports,
boxes, cabinets, or other equipment.
b. Installation of raceway that has been crushed or deformed.
c. Use of torches for bending PVC.
d. Spray applied PVC cement.
e. Boring holes in truss members.
f. Notching of structural members.
g. Supporting raceway from ceiling system support wires.
C. Boxes:
1. Boxes shall be accessible and installed with approved cover.
2. Do not locate device boxes that are on opposite sides of framed walls in the same stud space. In
other wall construction, do not install boxes back to back.
3. Locate boxes so pipes, ducts, or other items do not obstruct outlets.
4. Install outlets flush with finished surface and level and plumb.
5. Support switch boxes larger than two-gang with side brackets and steel bar hangers in framed
walls.
6. At time of substantial completion, install blank plates on uncovered outlet boxes that are for
future use.
7. Install air / vapor barrier back boxes behind outlet boxes that penetrate vapor barrier.
8. Location:
a. Install boxes at door locations on latch side of door, unless explicitly shown otherwise on
Drawings. Verify door swings shown on electrical drawings with architectural drawings,
and report discrepancies to Architect before rough-in. Distance of switch boxes from jamb
shall be within 6 inches of door jamb.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 5
b. Arrange boxes for ceiling light fixtures symmetrically with respect to room dimensions and
structural features.
c. Properly center boxes located in walls with respect to doors, panels, furring, trim and
consistent with architectural details. Where two or more outlets occur, space them uniformly
and in straight lines with each other, if possible.
d. Center ceramic tile boxes in tile.
END OF SECTION
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 1
SECTION 26 0553
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Nameplates and labels.
B. Wire and cable markers.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and
related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for electrical identification.
1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements
B. In the event of conflict regarding electrical identification requirements between this
Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16 inch high white letters
on a black background.
B. Nameplates (Emergency Equipment): Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, minimum
3/16 inch high white letters on a red background.
C. Wire and Cable Markers: Split sleeve or tubing type. Cloth or wraparound adhesive types
not approved.
D. Conductor-color Tape: Colored vinyl electrical tape.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
B. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 2
C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts. Secure nameplate to outside face of panelboard
doors.
D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application.
E. Electrical Contractor shall write the circuit number to which each device is connected on
the inside of the box (clearly visible when device is removed) and on the backside of each
coverplate. Use a permanent black marker.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 3
3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION
A. Conductors for power circuits to be identified per the following schedule.
System Voltage
Conductor 480Y/277V 208Y/120V
Phase A Brown Black
Phase B Orange Red
Phase C Yellow Blue
Neutral Grey White
Grounding Green Green
Isolated Ground Green with Green with
yellow stripe yellow stripe
Switchleg (lighting) Purple Pink
3.03 NAME PLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE
A. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below.
B. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers:
1. 1st Line - Equpment Name: 1/4 inch Lettering.
2. 2nd Line - Voltage Rating: 3/16 inch Lettering
3. 3rd Line - Feed Source: 3/16 inch Lettering
4. 4th Line - Available Fault Current: 3/16 inch Lettering
5. Nameplate Examples:
PANEL: HA
480Y/277V FEED FROM: MSB-2 SCA: 18,560 AMPS
MCC-A: SEC. 1
480V-3P
FEED FROM:
MSB-2 SCA: 18,560 AMPS
C. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters in Switchboards, and Motor
Control Centers:
1. 1st Line - Load Served: 1/4 inch Lettering.
2. 2nd Line - Location of Load: 3/16 inch Lettering
3. Nameplate Examples:
SWBD: MSB
480Y/277V
FEED FROM: UTIL. SCA: 35,680 AMPS
PUMP: P-1
MECH. RM
112
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 4
D. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters:
1. 1st Line - Load Served: 1/4 inch Lettering.
2. 2nd Line - Voltage Rating: 3/16 inch Lettering
3. 3rd Line - Feed Source: 3/16 inch Lettering
4. Nameplate Examples:
E. Transformers: 3/16 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify primary and
secondary voltages, primary source, and secondary load and location.
1. 1st Line - Equpment Name: 3/16 inch Lettering.
2. 2nd Line - Voltage Rating: 1/8 inch Lettering
3. 3rd Line - Feed Source: 1/8 inch Lettering
4. 4th Line - Available Fault Current: 3/16 inch Lettering
5. Nameplate Example:
XFMR:TA
480-208Y/120V
FEED FROM: HA-2 SUPPLIES: PNL LA SCA: 18,560 AMPS
END OF SECTION
FAN: F-1
480V-3P FEED FROM: HM-1,3,5
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PANELBOARDS 26 2417 - 1
SECTION 26 2417 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Distribution panelboards.
B. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and
related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for panelboards.
1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
2. Section 26 0553 - Electrical Identification.
B. In the event of conflict regarding panelboard requirements between this Section and any
other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide the following in addition to the standard requirements: Include outline and support
point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating,
circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
1.04 SPARE PARTS
A. Keys: Furnish two each to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PANELBOARDS
A. Square D NQOD – NF
B. “Power Link” Panelboards shall be SQ-D ONLY.
2.02 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; circuit breaker type: FS W-P-115; Type I, Class I.
B. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1. Cabinet size: 5 3/4 inches deep; 20-inches wide, mount
per plans.
C. Provide cabinet front with concealed trim clamps and hinged door with flush lock. Finish
in manufacturer’s standard gray enamel.
D. Provide panelboards with aluminum bus, ratings as scheduled on Drawings. Provide
ground bus in all panelboards.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PANELBOARDS 26 2417 - 2
E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1; provide circuit breakers with integral
thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as
type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits.
F. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16 inch high white letters
on a black background. Label to include panel identification, voltage and source. Label to
be attached with screws.
2.03 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB1; circuit breaker type.
B. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1, mount per plans.
C. Cabinet Size: 5-3/4 inches deep; 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20
inches for 480 bolt panelboards.
D. Provide flush surface cabinet front with typewritten directory, concealed trim clamps,
concealed hinge and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer’s standard gray
enamel.
E. Provide panelboards with aluminum bus, ratings as scheduled on Drawings. Provide
ground bus in all panelboards.
F. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: as shown on Drawings.
G. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, FS W-C-375; plug-on type thermal magnetic
trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL
listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits. Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter
circuit breakers where scheduled on Drawings. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type
HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits.
H. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16 inch high white letters
on a black background. Label to include panel identification and voltage. Label to be
attached with screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards plumb in conformance with NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Height: 78 inches to top.
C. Adjust trim to cover all openings.
D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) PANELBOARDS 26 2417 - 3
E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to
reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.
F. Provide typewritten circuit schedules in lighting and distribution panelboards and load
centers to identify panelboard and load served by each branch breaker. Index shall include
specific information including actual room names and numbers and load served. Obtain
actual room names from Architect prior to producing indexes.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at any
panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in the panelboard to
balance the phase loads within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper phasing for
multiwire branch circuits.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment,
anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for
circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses.
END OF SECTION
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 1
SECTION 26 2726
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Wall switches.
B. Receptacles.
C. Device plates and box covers.
D. Cords and caps.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and
related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for wiring devices.
1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
B. In the event of conflict regarding requirements for wiring devices between this Section and
any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet.
B. FS W-S-896 - Switch, Toggle.
C. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL SWITCHES.
1-POLE 3-WAY 4-WAY W-PILOT
Hubbell 1221 X 1223 X 1234 X 1221-P1 X
P&S 20AC1 X 20AC3 X 20AC4 X 20ACI-CPL
Leviton 1223 X 1223 X 1224 X
Eagle 2221X 2223X 2224X
2.02 WALL SWITCHES
A. Wall Switches for Lighting Circuits FS W-S-896; ac general use snap switch with toggle
rocker handle, rated 20 amperes and 120-277 volts ac. Handle: Standard color , to be
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 2
selected, in all areas. Screw type terminals only. (Standards color shall include brown,
gray, ivory, black or a white for all devices.)
B. Pilot Light Type: Green pilot handle; handle lighted when switch is ON.
C. Locator Type: Lighted handle.
D. Provide 3-way and 4-way switches of matching style, appearance and specification as
indicated on drawings.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 3
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RECEPTACLES
MFGR. C.O.'S
Hubbell 5352 X
P&S 5352 X
Leviton 5352 X
Eagle 5362X
2.04 RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience and Straight-blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 1.
B. Locking-Blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 5.
C. Convenience Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1; Type 5-20R. Nylon face: Standard
color, to be selected, in all areas. Emergency receptacles: Red nylon face. (Standarad
colors shall include brown, gray, ivory, black and white for all devices.)
D. Weatherproof Receptacles: Receptacles as specified mounted in a cast steel box with
gasketed, weatherproof device plate as specified.
E. Specific-use Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1 or WD 5; type as indicated on
Drawings, brown nylon face.
F. GFCI Receptacles: Duplex convenience receptacle with integral ground fault current
interrupter. NEMA Type 5-20R. All units shall be feed-through type for downstream
device protection. All receptacles indicated to be installed in a toilet room, bathroom, roof
top, and outdoors or within 6 feet of a sink, basin, tub or floor sink shall be GFIC protected
2.05 SPECIFIC PURPOSE RECEPTACLES
A. NEMA WD 1 or WD 5; type as indicated on Drawings.
B. Isolated Ground Type: Straight blade type 5-20R as indicated on the Drawings. Grey nylon
face.
C. Twist lock type. NEMA configuration as shown on the Drawings.
2.06 WALL PLATES
A. Decorative Cover Plate: Stainless Steel in all areas. All isolated ground receptacle covers
shall bear the engraved phrase “ISOLATED GROUND”.
B. Engraved Plates: Same plate as specified herein. Provide with engraved characters 1/8 inch
high characters (all letters in upper case) with filler of black color.
C. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device covers.
2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CORDS AND CAPS
A. Hubbell.
John W. HART BUILDING PHASE MEP-B REMODEL Construction Documents Bid Set
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Rexburg Idaho
20054 (10/6/20) WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 4
B. Leviton.
C. Pass and Seymour.
2.08 CORDS AND CAPS
A. Straight-blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 1.
B. Locking-blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 5.
C. Attachment Plug Configuration: Match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for
equipment.
D. Cord Construction: Oil-resistant thermoset insulated Type SO multiconductor flexible cord
with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for hard usage in damp locations.
E. Cord Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment and rating of branch circuit
overcurrent protection.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall switches 48 inches above floor, OFF position down.
B. Install convenience receptacles 18 inches above floor, 4 inches above backsplash, or as
noted, in a vertical position with grounding pole to the down.
C. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on Contract Drawings.
D. Install convenience receptacles in 4 square box in a vertical position with the ground pole
down.
END OF SECTION